Home

Entire manual as PDF

1. Cable Management System m 41 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 42 HW Cable Management System Chapter 3 JUNOS Internet Software Overview The JUNOS Internet software is especially designed for the large production networks typically supported by Internet Service Providers ISPs It incorporates Internet Protocol IP routing software and software for management of interfaces networks and the router chassis The JUNOS Internet software runs on the Routing Engine The software consists of processes that support Internet routing protocols control the router s interfaces and the router chassis itself and provide an interface for system management The processes run on top of a kernel that coordinates the communication among processes and has a direct link to the Packet Forwarding Engine software Use the JUNOS Internet software to configure the routing protocols that run on the router and the properties of router interfaces After you have activated a software configuration use the JUNOS Internet software to monitor the protocol traffic passing through the router and to troubleshoot protocol and network connectivity problems For additional information about the JUNOS Internet software including its security features and a list of the industry standards it supports see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide For complete information about configuring the software including examples see the JUNOS Internet sof
2. 57 Routing Engine during initial installation ooo 90 for maintenance or replacement 65 SFM during initial installation 87 for maintenance or replacement 88 DEP EE 90 repair of router or components ssssssessssse 255 replacement instructions See installation instructions removal instructions request chassis routing engine master switch command co doloti ies tede det ladageenages TORTOR 22 requirements See specifications reset button on Routing Engine ssesrcsrrrrre 24 ib 65 RJ 21 cable piro ts s secil esp dee ess 274 RJ 45 cable connector pinouts issii 269 RJ 48 cable pinOuts eee iio 270 router COTFIBUFTat ON et RER AAEN 121 routing Poli Vian pci 47 protocol process software module of Routing A ed e etr Ee 44 protocols PVA C 44 286 m Index PO wise shared ts debetis ri art tbe ede de 46 tables scc RSS 47 Routing Engine alarm handling Dn 54 chassis e oem la pd a eA 49 components battere ae eme deli Ra AS 24 GEESS 43 configuration files storage 0005 54 description hardware and function 23 installation instructions during initial installation 105 for maintenance or replacement 168 interface process isses sessi ert teet ces 49 l E T Ae See E EAE 49 LEDS et sae tdi ottiene etes toan 24 maintenance iios oir tarda 151
3. 000 0c cece ee ees REMOVING AN EE Installing an MCS toronto dba Removing the PC Cant nest HS Rem Insert tlie PC Card ica ebe Seege Removing a Routing Engne e Installing a Routing ERSINE ue dia dara tee REN NNN ENEE NNN R rndoving am BPO ada te cadet degno RAS A ees Installing an ER iia id Seed Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to a PIG i aee terere etes REMOVING EE Installing a POS seuss rie ee T eoe ec ev guae Mere ya Eder x eR E REMOVING a PIG ie corpor orar parse Da pp PEER irte pate Installing a PIC i ts eaa o oT e RAS RR Ai due bates ad GENEE Connecting Fiber Optic Cableoabt ae a a Connecting Fiber Optic Cableoabt erii rur onid REMOVING an SEM s taste ch geo etat EE e dee Ree aee Installing amnSEM Lip tito e REN tet eee ted cle dod eir eius Small Formi Factor Pluggable SPP cosida Eed pet b teens Removing the Circuit Breaker Box 55 55 54 55 56 57 58 58 59 61 62 64 65 67 69 72 75 76 77 79 81 84 84 87 89 90 90 95 97 98 99 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure ure 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 List of Figures Installing a Power Supply ict d ter bebe Lin Ce et e tems 200 Disconnecting Power Cables ic seni cenc
4. ssu for maintenance or replacement Seral NUDE uec ect Roe riadas Status Checking reser e unes COIS TEQUIFEG ee NEEN Get Ae ests jb E e edd e PFE See Packet Forwarding Engine Physical Interface Card See PIC PIC ASIC OR imita ATM use of analyzer 0 eee cable installation instructions removal InstruoctHons enren tools Tequited deu steterat einen LEE description hardware and function E1 pinouts for RJ 48 cable ooo EIA 530 pinouts for X 21 cable Fast Ethernet 48 port pinouts for RJ 21 cable installation instructions 288 maintenance es satu dich e att ettet addi offline DUTTON o rere ot tte tte ett ead removal Instruction Serial number ere peteret Epp spits Mee SONET SDH alarm r essages c cv eol e eod xen pt analyzer use OE cssc eee Re a clock source Tor oou qe eter e rin power budget calculation 72 status checking ise e ees 154 T1 pinouts for RJ 48 cable 270 tools Tequired ai Ata 139 troubleshooting uie petet t Ep 215 ping COMINO orain r a PURO PUE Da 207 pinouts DB 9 cable connector ports auxiliary console 270 ARA hee AE 274 RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector port 269 NEE 270 VIS cal atar nicn a saan cta RS Si sue e 273 2521 cable i ciet tea e e a ack 275 policy routing ENEE EEN Ze dee r 47 port auxiliary See auxiliary port
5. semicolon J Web GUI Conventions Bold typeface gt bold right angle bracket Description Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration statement to which it applies Enclose a variable for which you can substitute one or more values Identify a level in the configuration hierarchy Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level Represents J Web graphical user interface GUI items you click or select Separates levels in a hierarchy of J Web selections List of Technical Publications Table 3 Juniper Networks Technical Documentation About This Guide Examples rsvp Required for dynamic MPLS only community name members community ids edit routing options static route default nexthop address retain E In the Logical Interfaces box select All Interfaces 8 To cancel the configuration click Cancel In the configuration editor hierarchy select Protocols gt Ospf Table 3 lists the software and hardware guides and release notes for Juniper Networks routing platforms that use the JUNOS Internet software and describes the contents of each book Description JUNOS for J series M series and T series Routing Platforms Configuration Guides Feature Guide System Basics Network Interfaces and Class of Service MPLS Applications Provides an overview of traffic engineering concepts and descri how to configure traffic
6. Power supply is inserted and is functioning Power supply is not functioning is starting up or is not properly inserted or airflow is not sufficient Power System mm 37 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide NO Amber On steadily Power supply is inserted but airflow around the AIRFLOW power supply is not sufficient original power supply only CB OFF On steadily Power supply is functioning but the circuit breaker is off Table 13 lists electrical specifications for the power supply Table 13 Electrical Specifications for Power Supply Description Specification Maximum power output Original power supply 2400 W nonisolated Enhanced power supply 3000 W nonisolated DC input voltage Nominal 48 VDC 60 VDC Operating range 42 to 72 VDC Output voltages 48V 8 3 A cooling system 8 3 V 6 A bias 48 V to 60 VQ 75 A Circuit Breaker Box The circuit breaker box is located on the rear of the chassis above the right power supply as shown in Figure 2 The circuit breaker box houses two circuit breakers and sets of terminal studs corresponding positionally to the two power supplies as shown in Figure 19 For proper router operation and power load sharing connect a different external DC power source to each set of terminal studs In addition a grounding cable attaches to separate grounding points located above the circuit breaker box as shown in Figure 2 For more information see
7. CAUTION When the FPC is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector levers bus bars or edge connectors They cannot support its weight 4 Align the rear bottom corners of the FPC with the guides at the bottom of the FPC slot Slide the FPC into the card cage until it contacts the midplane 5 Push the ends of the ejector levers inward until they are nearly flush with the face of the FPC 6 Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC to seat the FPC securely in the chassis 7 Ifyou are installing different PICs in the FPC follow this procedure for each one a If the PIC uses fiber optic cable verify that there is a rubber safety cap over each transceiver on the faceplate Install a cap if necessary b Slide the PIC into a slot in the FPC aligning the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the FPC slot and then firmly pushing the PIC into place CAUTION Insert the PIC straight into the FPC slot to avoid damaging the components on the bottom of the PIC c Tighten the thumbscrews at the ends of the PIC faceplate simultaneously and at about the same rate tightening the two screws alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the FPC slot making it difficult to turn the screws Verify that the PIC is seated properly 8 If any of the PICs on the FPC connect to fiber optic cable remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and cable W
8. Perform the following procedures see Figure 44 Le If you are front mounting the router remove the center mounting ear from each side of the chassis Also we recommend installing a shelf or other support for the rear of the chassis Attach the lifting handle to the rear of the chassis screwing the thumbscrews at its corners into the holes located next to the SFM slots on the chassis see Figure 43 If you are installing the chassis in a lower rack space use the set of holes adjacent to the slots labeled SFM O and SFM 1 If you are installing Installing the Chassis into the Rack m 97 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide the chassis in an upper rack space use the set of holes adjacent to the slots labeled SFM 2 and SFM 3 Figure 43 Attaching the Lifting Handle 1935 3 Prepare to lift the router W One person stands behind the chassis and grasps the lifting handle W Two people stand on either side of the chassis Each grasps the bar at the bottom of the FPC card cage with one hand and places the other hand under the chassis near the rear 4 Lift the chassis and position it in the rack A WARNING To prevent injury keep your back straight and lift with your legs not your back Avoid twisting your body as you lift Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid 5 Align the bottom hole in both front support posts or center mounting brackets with a hole in e
9. Tee ca Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label 1621 The serial number on the craft interface is located on the back of the panel behind the alarm LEDs as shown in Figure 111 Locating Component Serial Numbers 257 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 111 Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label 1620 AA1234 Serial number ID label DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label The serial number ID label on a DC power supply is located on the faceplate as shown in Figure 112 Figure 112 DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label O UNN SP0402 2A REV C DI DAA P N 740 001243 REV 03 A TNO S N KM28411 121499 1619 258 Locating Component Serial Numbers Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware FPC Serial Number ID Label The serial number ID label on an FPC is located on the right side as shown in Figure 113 Figure 113 FPC Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label AA1234 MCS Serial Number ID Label The serial number on an MCS is located on the bottom at the left side as shown in Figure 114 Locating Component Serial Numbers m 259 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 114 MCS Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label AA1234 PCG Serial Number ID Label The serial number on a PCG is located on the top close to the midplane conn
10. Control of FPC resets If the MCS detects errors in an FPC it attempts to reset the FPC After three unsuccessful reset attempts the MCS takes the FPC offline and informs the Routing Engine Other FPCs are unaffected and system operation continues MCS Components Each MCS shown in Figure 10 has the following components PCI interface Connects the MCS to the Routing Engine 100 Mbps Ethernet switch Carries signals and monitoring data between router components 19 44 MHz stratum 3 reference clock Generates clock signal for SONET SDH PICs 12C controller Monitors the status of router components Three LEDs Indicate MCS status There is a blue one labeled MASTER a green one labeled OK and an amber one labeled FAIL Table 8 describes the LED states Offline button Prepares the MCS for removal from the router when pressed Extractor clips Control the locking system that secures the MCS in the chassis Hardware Component Overview Figure 10 Miscellaneous Control Subsystem Extractor clip Offline button Extractor clip Table 8 States for MCS LEDs unes ome state CT OK Green On steadily MCS is functioning normally MCS is starting up FAIL On steadily MCS has failed Craft Interface The craft interface provides status and troubleshooting information at a glance and has buttons for deactivating alarms and preparing FPCs for removal The craft interface is located on the front of th
11. LEDs on Hardware Components nc Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages Blown Fuse Indicators ee EE Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center Troubleshooting the Cooling System corras Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components Troubleshooting FRCS 4 eos od orte a ads Troubleshooting PICS c uut tartas UL ARI erro meta Troubleshooting the Power System All LEDs o Both Supplies Ate Off aceti All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct Part 4 Appendixes Appendix A Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information 221 Definition of Safety Warning Levels serrin ie ee en p e e e eens Safety Guidelines and Warnings oocccccccccccoccnonnnnnnnnnnn eee eee eens General Safety Guidelines and Warnings 0 cece cece eee eee Qualified Personnel Wamming Restricted Access Area Warning ccc eect eee Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings 0c eee eee General Electrical Safety Guidelines sees DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelmes 000 Copper Conductors Warning DC Power Disconnection Warning sess DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning sscecsis DC Power Wiring Sequence Wang DC Power Wiring Terminations Wang Grounded Equipment Warning isse In Case ot Electrical AcCIdeDE miis a eh eere dd Midplane Energy Hazard Wang Multiple
12. l extr mit de c blage En reliant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est rectifi pour rectifier RTN RTN puis 48 V 48 V En d branchant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est 48 V 48 V RTN RTN a alors rectifi pour rectifier Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom Versorgung mit den passenden Ans tzen am Verdrahtung Ende Wenn man Energie anschlie t wird die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge gerieben um RTN zu RTN dann 48 V bis 48 V zu reiben Wenn sie Energie trennt ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge 48 V bis 48 V RTN zu RTN rieb dann um zu reiben Beachten Sie da der Erdungsdraht immer zuerst angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC Cablare l alimentatore CC usando i connettori adatti all estremit del cablaggio come illustrato La corretta sequenza di cablaggio da massa a massa da positivo a positivo da linea ad L e da negativo a negativo da neutro a N Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo Safety Guidelines and Warnings mm 233 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 234 Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekven
13. m General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 229 Safety Guidelines and Warnings M 227 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 228 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 229 Copper Conductors Warning on page 230 DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 231 DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 232 DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 233 DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 234 Grounded Equipment Warning on page 235 In Case of Electrical Accident on page 236 Midplane Energy Hazard Warning on page 236 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 236 Power Disconnection Warning on page 237 TN Power Warning on page 238 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information General Electrical Safety Guidelines Install the router in compliance with the following local national or international electrical codes United States National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 United States National Electrical Code Canada Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 CSA C22 1 Other countries International Electromechanical Commission IEC 60364 Part 1 through Part 7 Evaluated to the TN power system Locate the emergency power off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical accident occurs you can quickly turn off the power Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace Never assu
14. BITSMNPUL cat ncaa tame vas booten MENSAS UE EY 34 console on CIP See console port Ethernet See Ethernet port power budget calculatiori la cea dvips 72 connecting for maintenance or replacement 202 connecting to berourer eee 117 disconnection instructions sssssssssssss 200 margin calculation csse 75 requirements for hardware components 65 supply See power supply SUISES aude tex Lise na ta eh leg 65 system load SHaririguin vise eto etm eim Pee uta 55 TEGUMGAN CY sisse teret eng este 55 SDeCIfICatiOriS xot etae baee tea th sah 64 power and grounding cables connection instructions during initial installation 117 for maintenance or replacement 202 disconnection instructions 005 200 IS ta SN 67 SpecIfICatl OL Abee SE 67 TOOIS TEQUITER oat EEN 139 power supply cables See power and grounding cables connectors to midplane ee eee 197 description and specifications 04 36 Geh He 67 installation instructions during initial installation 109 for maintenance or replacement 199 maintenance iv oder Y pl 157 removal instructions during initial installation 86 for maintenance or replacement 197 senal number boi Sieg 258 tools rT quired E 139 Index tTOUBIESHOOUNG Ae seg e rre dg 215 KLEER 83 proced
15. Installing the Front Impeller Assembly To install the front impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 74 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Grasp the sides of the impeller assembly and align the rear of the assembly with the guides inside the chassis 3 Slide the impeller assembly all the way into the chassis 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver tighten the captive screw at each corner of the craft interface Figure 74 Installing the Front Impeller Assembly gt Captive screw 1216 Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly The rear lower impeller assembly is located at the lower left of the rear of the chassis above the left power supply as shown in Figure 2 It weighs about 4 Ib 1 8 kg 154 1H Replacing Cooling System Components Replacing Hardware Components The assembly is hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 To replace it perform the following procedures m Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155 m Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly To remove the rear lower impeller assembly
16. Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines The various PICs supported on the router accept different kinds of network cable including multimode and single mode fiber optic cable For more information see the following sections Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications on page 71 Signal Loss in Multimode and Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable on page 71 Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber Optic Cable on page 71 Calculating Power Budget for Fiber Optic Cable on page 72 Calculating Power Margin for Fiber Optic Cable on page 73 Attenuating to Prevent Saturation at SONET SDH PICs on page 74 70 W Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines Preparing for Router Installation Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications The router supports PICs that use various kinds of network cable including multimode and single mode fiber optic cable For information about the type of cable used by each PIC see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide Signal Loss in Multimode and Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally bounce off the walls of the fiber Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs as light sources LEDs are not coherent sources however They spray varying wavelengths of light into the multimode fiber which reflects the light at different angles Light rays travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber causing signal dispersion When light trave
17. Power Connection and Cable Specifications on page 67 a NOTE The router must be connected to at least two separate external power sources AN CAUTION There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity To connect power to the router follow this procedure see Figure 60 Providing Power to the Router m 117 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 1 Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure 2 For each power supply verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box is in the OFF 0 position 5 Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground 4 Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with the router to the grounding cable 5 Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the bottom rear of the chassis The grounding points are sized for 1 4 20 UNC screws 6 Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points first with the washers
18. W Power Supply on page 36 mM Circuit Breaker Box on page 58 m Fuses on page 39 The router has two load sharing pass through power supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 For information about power supply redundancy and replaceability see Power System on page 35 Each power supply has the following components see Figure 17 and Figure 18 m LEDs Indicate power supply status There is a green one labeled CB ON a blue one labeled OUTPUT OK and an amber one labeled CB OFF The original power supply also has an amber LED labeled NO AIRFLOW Table 12 describes the LED states In addition power supply failure triggers the red alarm LED on the craft interface and the RED ALARM relay contact on the CIP See Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button on page 28 W Self test button Tests the power supply Do not press this button it is for use by qualified service personnel only Figure 17 Original Power Supply ow 6 eh a x TEST Figure 18 Enhanced Power Supply 9 ENHA NCED PEM Melde ON aneen SE S Do OR wesch o ING pe ING D n CBON M THE OUTPUT sw ER o MINUTE CB OFF P st TIGHTEN HESE CRE FIRST SE s WS Flag Table 12 States for Power Supply LEDs Power supply is inserted correctly and is receiving CB ON On steadily OUTPUT OK Blue On steadily 9 power Circuit breaker is on o N Hardware Component Overview
19. then with the screws AN CAUTION Do not substitute metric screws such as M6 for the 1 4 20 UNC screws that screw into the grounding points screws other than 1 4 20 UNC screws can strip the threading in the grounding points 7 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screws securing the protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Remove the cover 8 Install one flat washer and one nut in that order on each power terminal stud W If no washers and nuts are already installed they should be in the accessory box W If two pairs of nuts and washers are installed on the studs use a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench to loosen the outer nut on each stud Remove the outer nuts and washers leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud AN CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench AN CAUTION The inner washer and nut prevent direct contact between the power cable lug and the circuit breaker box which can cause a short circuit 9 Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs 118 Providing Power to the Router 10 Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration m Connect the positive source cable lugs to the return terminals which are labeled RTN m Connect the negative source cable lugs to the input ter
20. 28 R 45 Coririector BL IEN e ege se deed Eeer EE 269 6 29 DB 9 Confector PINOU eu in socal se Ge dE SEAN 270 e 30 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinout 008 270 e 31 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinout 271 e 32 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinout 0 205 272 e 33 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinout s ssssisissrrso 272 e 54 DB 25 Connector to V 35 Connector Pinot 273 e 35 DB 25 Connector to DB 15 X 21 Connector Pinout 02 e eee 274 36 R21 Pin ASSIGNIMEN S simio rape 275 List of Tables NW xvii M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide xviii W List of Tables About This Guide Objectives Audience W Objectives on page xix m Audience on page xix m Documentation Conventions on page xix W List of Technical Publications on page xxi W Documentation Feedback on page xxiii W Requesting Support on page xxiii This manual describes hardware installation and basic troubleshooting procedures for the Juniper Networks M160 Internet router It explains how to prepare your site for router installation unpack and install the hardware power on the router perform initial software configuration and perform routine maintenance After completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this manual refer to the JUNOS Internet software configuration guides for information about further JU
21. It is not automatically copied to the other Routing Engine To remove and insert a PC card perform the following procedures W Removing the PC Card on page 165 m Insert the PC Card on page 164 Removing the PC Card The PC card is inserted in the slot labeled PC CARD in the Routing Engine faceplate To remove the PC card follow this procedure see Figure 83 1 Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86 2 Press the eject button located next to the PC card slot in the Routing Engine faceplate Note that the PC card slot might be located in a different position from that shown in Figure 83 3 When the PC card pops partially out of the slot grasp the card and pull it straight out of the slot Replacing Host Module Components m 163 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 83 Removing the PC Card e Eject button 1926 Insert the PC Card To insert the PC card follow this procedure see Figure 84 1 Orient the PC card with the Juniper Networks logo facing in the direction specified on the Routing Engine faceplate Insert the card into the slot 2 Press the card firmly all the way into the slot Note that the PC card slot might be located in a different position from that shown in Figure 84 3 Reinstall the rear
22. Software and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software whether oral or written including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained herein No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing by the party to be charged If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this Agreement If you have any questions about this agreement contact Juniper Networks at the following address Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA Attn Contracts Administrator Table of Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 About This Guide xix ODJECUVES ett lr Lus Raise restes ins Ms det Ux Rus Ei drum xix AUGICN COs 620 ouo o ote nore ud teas dde c sebo IN LS xix Documentation Conventions sv ics elite A Utilis xix List of Technical Publications oooooooccooccoccooconconononronrn e xxi Documentation Feedback entitats riders CUBE heb eed ade Vete xxiii R q esting SUPPO Ess roce SA c HERO d run xxiii Product Overview System Overview 3 SYSTEM DeSCrIDHOD sro sce lotte totor debi nos ERG 5 Field R
23. The following example also specifies a slot number 1 which is optional user host gt show chassis sfm detail 1 136 HN Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components Maintaining Hardware Components Slot 1 information State Online SPP Temperature 43 degrees C 109 degrees F SPR Temperature 43 degrees C 109 degrees F Total CPU DRAM 64 MB Total SSRAM 8 MB Internet Processor II Version 1 Foundry IBM Part number 9 Start time 2003 04 29 16 12 26 PDT Uptime 5 days 22 hours 28 minutes 26 seconds Packet scheduling mode Disabled For further description of the output from the commands see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Maintaining Power Supplies To verify that the power system is functioning normally perform the following procedures regularly Check the LEDs on the faceplate of both power supplies A power supply is functioning correctly when the green LED labeled CB ON is lit steadily indicating that the circuit breaker is switched on and the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK is lit steadily indicating that the supply is receiving power from the DC source If these LEDs are blinking or other LEDs are lit there could be an error condition For a summary of LED states see Power Supply on page 36 Issue the following CLI command to check the status of the power supplies The following example specifies a slot number 0
24. You can remove FPCs in any order however As you remove each FPC label it with its slot number and record the relevant information in the checklist in Table 25 Table 23 FPC Removal Checklist To remove the FPCs follow this procedure see Figure 41 94 HN Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Locate the FPC or blank panel located in the leftmost slot of the card cage on the front of the chassis It is directly below the offline button on the craft interface that is labeled FPCO 4 If the slot is covered by a blank panel you can leave it in place If the slot contains an FPC perform the following steps a Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary b Pull the ends of the ejector levers which are adjacent to the thumbscrews away from the face of the FPC until they are nearly perpendicular to it c Grasp the top and bottom flanges of the card carrier and slide the FPC about halfway out of the card cage d Place one hand around the front of the FPC the PI
25. a cf G4 Dt La of UN Ly 0 Ke U D 9 M160 chassis Shipping crate base 1168 AAA Table 21 Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis Unpacking the Router m 79 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 80 HN Unpacking the Router Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift Because the router weighs between 190 Ib 86 kg and about 370 5 lb 168 kg depending on configuration using a mechanical lift to install it is recommended This chapter provides instructions If you do not use a lift see Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift on page 83 This chapter has the following sections m Tools and Parts Required on page 81 m Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81 Tools and Parts Required To install the chassis into a rack using a mechanical lift you need the following tools and parts W Mechanical lift W 5 32 in Allen hexagonal wrench for tightening the mounting screws provided in the accessory box do not substitute a metric size wrench m Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 if removing center mounting brackets or installing rear support shelf Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift Using a mechanical lift to maneuver the router into the rack is recommended because of the router s size and weight The lift must be able to accommodate the router s weight between 190 Ib 86 kg and about 570 5 Ib 168 kg depending on
26. configuration and must fit between the support posts of the rack a NOTE If you are installing multiple routers in a rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift m 81 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 82 First perform the following prerequisite procedures Verify that the router site meets the requirements described in Preparing for Router Installation on page 59 Place the rack in its permanent location allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance and secure it to the building structure For details see Rack Requirements on page 59 Read the information in Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 239 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 239 Remove the router from the shipping carton as described in Unpacking the Router on page 77 Then perform the following procedures to install the router 1 If you are front mounting the router remove the center mounting ear from each side of the chassis Also we recommend installing a shelf or other support for the rear of the chassis Load the router onto the lift making sure it rests securely on the lift platform Use the lift to position the router at the correct height in the rack Align the bottom hole in both front support posts or center mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail making sure the chassis is level Inst
27. in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components mM 1721 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 11 If you are not reinstalling an FPC into the emptied FPC slot within a short time install a blank FPC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the FPC card cage A CAUTION After removing an FPC from the chassis wait at least 30 seconds before reinserting it removing an FPC from a different slot or inserting an FPC into a different slot Figure 87 Removing an FPC Offline button Ejector levers Installing an FPC To install an FPC follow this procedure see Figure 88 and Figure 89 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router 172 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Verify that the ends of the ejector levers which are located at each end of the FPC are pushed outward nearly perpendicular to the face of the FPC 3 Grasp the front of the FPC with one hand and place the other hand under the FPC to support it
28. isses 65 electromagnetic compatibility See EMC pulsen eegene rote aeri PPS 65 Index electrostatic bag using to store Componentg s u ssees 226 discharge See ESD EMC EMI compliance with requirements 254 standardse vied see 0 da ae ey dE 253 NS coe deett ue pete rette dg 65 EMP i ros san rada 65 environmental specifications o 62 ESD points ON Chassis criar 7 preventing damage to components by 226 Ethernet port for Routing Engine management cable connection during initial installation 114 replacement instructions u i 146 SPECiliGatiONS coss asit rotes ea eM 74 tools required ici AE 139 e TEE EEN 33 ETSI rack standard 60 exception packets handling of 19 F fan tray installation instructions during initial installation 102 for maintenance or replacement 149 SLEG UEL v oos tati tds Ko teft 150 removal instructions during initial installation ooo 93 for maintenance or replacement 148 tools TEQUILE A Barge he Seier Rear T eL 139 trOUBlESHOOUNE maroni 212 LEE 83 Fast Ethernet 48 port PIC pinouts for RJ 21 cable 274 fiber optic cable See cable fiber optic field replaceable units RU 4 fire safety specifications 0 aa 63 Flexible PIC Concentrator See FPC TONE CONVENTOS maatti id XX forwarding tables cren ted ha ke 47 FPC ASICS On iue adi We vate rd de 16 blank panel Asa iaa 14 COMPONEN Eume
29. management ports ee Va me 55 cable and wire specifications 74 GESEMPHON ec Geen aser m ess ttes ot Mes 55 tools regq ired i ees teo ordena 159 See also auxiliary port console port Ethernet port management DroCese 02 Da R 49 MIB IU Process 51 eget path ye uta e tes 49 packet counting Ae deese bere REN dd 54 pinouts for cable connectons oo 269 removal instructions during initial installation ooo 90 for maintenance or replacement 165 reset DUON idee ee var cp reped ades 24 role in system architecture 00 0004 55 routing Protocol process ces e xeu 44 table maintenarice io ev Rete ere 54 Serial NUMBER decere e tees 261 SNMP process sts cue ve epe drid Bane 49 status displaying ue ENEE or eens 151 toolSdequited z ti e p RR rt df 159 WIE EE 85 S safety Informiatiorm zs d esed ae pereo mete t ad 221 See also warnings safety standards sisisi tds E agas 255 seismic earthquake designed level 62 self test button Power SUPPLY tee de EE RE Ce S 36 serial number CB podia da 257 craftnterfacexvu ts 257 PO PLC 259 in output from show chassis hardware command EE 255 MESA ras 259 POQGcousite tele es retar panties 260 PIG tos SL MTS Stet 260 power supply deeg Steet 258 ROUTING ENGINE s eet piti La A 261 el DT 262 SFM ASICS O m 19 COMPONEN iaa td 20 description hardware and function 19 installation instruction
30. mer n 10 grader Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings 244 Single mode Physical Interface Cards PICs are equipped with laser transmitters which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U S Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825 1 Al1 A2 requirements Observe the following guidelines and warnings m General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 245 m Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 245 m Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 245 m Laser Beam Warning on page 246 W Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning on page 247 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information General Laser Safety Guidelines When working around PICs observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye injury W Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown Sources W Donotexamine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments m Avoid direct exposure to the beam WARNING Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina so focusing the eye directly on a laser source even a low power laser could permanently damage the eye Class 1 Laser Product Warning WARNING Class 1 laser product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 laser produkt Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote Attention Produit laser de classe I Warnung Laserprodukt der
31. n El equipo est dise ado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentaci n tipo TN IT Varning Enheten ar konstruerad for anvandning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN IT typ Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during router installation W Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 259 W Installation Instructions Warning on page 239 m Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 240 m Ramp Warning on page 244 Chassis Lifting Guidelines The weight of a fully configured chassis is about 570 5 Ib 168 kg Observe the following guidelines for lifting and moving the router W Before moving the router read the guidelines in Preparing for Router Installation on page 59 to verify that the intended site meets the specified power environmental and clearance requirements W Do not attempt to lift a fully configured router by yourself Using a mechanical lift to maneuver the router into a rack is recommended If a lift cannot be used a minimum of three people must lift the router and you must remove components from the chassis before lifting For lifting and component removal instructions see Initial Installation on page 57 W Before lifting or moving the router disconnect all external cables m As when lifting any heavy object lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your back Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting
32. on each power terminal stud W If no washers and nuts are already installed they should be in the accessory box W iftwo pairs of nuts and washers are installed on the studs use a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench to loosen the outer nut on each stud Remove the outer nuts and washers leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench CAUTION The inner washer and nut prevent direct contact between the power cable lug and the circuit breaker box which can cause a short circuit 9 Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs Replacing Power System Components m 203 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide m Connect the positive source cable lugs to the return terminals which are labeled RTN m Connect the negative source cable lugs to the input terminals which are labeled 48V 10 Install another washer and nut in that order on each terminal stud to secure the power cable lug Using a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench tighten the nuts 11 Verify that the source power cabling and the grounding cabling are correct that they are not touching or blocking access to router components and that they do not drape where people could trip on them 12 Replace the protective shield over the terminal studs and use a Phillips sc
33. see Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 112 4 Turn on the power to the external management device 5 Press one power switch on the circuit box to the ON position 6 Observe the LEDs on the power supply faceplate m As an enhanced power supply powers on the green CB ON LED lights steadily the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks for a short time then lights steadily and the amber CB OFF LED does not light W As an original power supply powers on the green CB ON LED lights steadily the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks for a short time then lights steadily and the amber CB OFF and NO AIRFLOW LEDs do not light NOTE After powering off a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on After powering on a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router again first issue the CLI request system halt command For more information see Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 After a power supply is powered on it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators such as LEDs on the power supply show chassis commands and messages on the craft interface LCD to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that a
34. set i9 o K window Batteries i 3 Central Battery plant i5 io office ground o Central office ground A WARNING Power plant ground and chassis ground must be connected to the same building ground Table 17 summarizes the specifications for the grounding and power cables which you supply The accessory box shipped with the router includes the cable lugs that attach to the terminal studs of the circuit breaker box see Figure 28 The cable lug shown in Figure 28 is also used for the grounding the chassis A CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit 68 m Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Preparing for Router Installation Table 17 DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications Maximum Cable Type Quantity and Specification Equal Length Power Eight 4 AWG 16 mm wires minimum or as permitted None by the local code Grounding One 8 AWG 8 4 mm wire minimum or as permitted None by the local code A WARNING For field wiring connections use copper conductors only For other electrical safety information see Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 227 A CAUTION Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape where people could t
35. these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate which is very sticky and difficult to clean In addition in minute amounts of moisture monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged NOTE To keep warranties effective do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally responsible manner Requirements and Specifications The router uses DC power There are two load sharing pass through power supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 The power supplies connect to the midplane which distributes power to router components according to their individual voltage requirements When the power supplies are installed and operational they automatically share the electrical load If a power supply stops functioning for any reason the remaining power supplies instantly begin providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning and can provide full power indefinitely For site wiring and power system guidelines requirements and
36. user host gt show chassis fpc pic status Slot 0 Online P 0 4x OC 3 SONET MM 1 1x CSTM1 SMIR 3 2x OC 3 ATM MM Slot 1 Online P 1x OC 12 SONET MM 1x OC 12 ATM MM 2x OC 3 ATM MM 2x OC 3 ATM MM p p ana 0000 WNRo p p P For further description of the output from the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference Troubleshooting the Power System The following LED states indicate that a power supply is functioning correctly W On the enhanced power supply the green LED labeled CB ONand blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK are lit and the amber LED labeled CB OFF is not lit m On the enhanced power supply the green LED labeled CB ONand blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK are lit and the amber LEDs labeled CB OFF and NO AIRFLOW are not lit If any other LED states apply consult the following sections m All LEDs on Both Supplies Are Off on page 215 m All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct on page 216 All LEDs on Both Supplies Are Off If all LEDs are off on both power supply faceplates either someone has switched off power to the router or the system temperature has exceeded the acceptable maximum In the latter case the host module shuts down both power supplies There is no power to the router so the alarm LEDs on the craft interface are not lit and the LCD also goes blank Troubleshooting the Power System WM 215 M160 Internet Router Hardware G
37. which is optional As shown in the sample output the value Online in the State column indicates that the power supply is operating normally user host gt show chassis environment pem 0 PEM 0 status State Online Temperature OK DC input OK DC Output OK Load Less than 40 percent Voltage 48 0 V input 55059 mV 48 0 V fan supply 50181 mv 5 0 V bias 5032 mV 8 0 V bias 8224 mV Maintaining Power Supplies m 137 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 138 CS NOTE The messages in the craft interface LCD and the output from CLI show commands refer to the power supply on the right as PEM O and the power supply on the left as PEM 1 For further description of the output from the command see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management W Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs and the LCD on the craft interface Power supply failure or removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the LEDs to light and an error message to appear on the LCD You can display the associated error messages by issuing the following CLI command user host gt show chassis alarms For a list of possible alarm messages see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 W Verify that the power source has the proper current rating and that each power supply is connected to a separate power source W Verify that the cable or cord connecting the power supply to the ext
38. 12 AWG 0 20 and 3 33 mm 5 Using a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver loosen the small screws on the face of the terminal block and remove the block from the relay contact 4 Using the 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver loosen the small screws on the side of the terminal block Remove existing wires from the slots in the front of the block and insert replacement wires Tighten the screws to secure the wire Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables m 147 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 5 Orient the terminal block according to the labels to the left of the appropriate relay contact NC means normally closed C means common and NO means normally open 6 Plug the terminal block into the relay contact and use a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block 7 Attach the other end of the wires to the external device Replacing Cooling System Components For instructions on replacing cooling system components see the following sections W Replacing the Fan Tray on page 148 W Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 150 W Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 154 m Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 156 Replacing the Fan Tray 148 To replace the fan tray perform the following procedures W Removing the Fan Tray on page 148 W Installing the Fan Tray on page 149 Removing the Fan Tray The fan tray is located behind the
39. 178 PE tA SEHE UR tle Seiten 181 power and grounding cables during initial installation 117 for maintenance or replacement 202 tools required ione tette 111 power supply during initial installation 09 for maintenance or replacement 99 rear COMPONEN COVE iei usto m ERE tet gH 09 rear lower impeller assembly during initial installation 05 for maintenance or replacement 55 rear upper impeller assembly during initial installation 04 for maintenance or replacement 58 router DreparatiOB IOF ssec cete ERR NRI RA 77 Routing Engine during initial installation 105 for maintenance or replacement 168 SFM during initial installation 108 for maintenance or replacement 189 UN 191 instructions calculation power reguitements cece eee 65 cleaning See cleaning instructions installation See installation instructions maintenance BIG gege xx rt Tag do 154 See maintenance guidelines packing router for shipment aee eee dea A 265 removal See removal instructions Site preparations eratis paa Let aE eege 59 DESEM 77 interface command line See CLI network See PIC process software module in Routing Engine 49 interference electrormagrietic eoir tanda 65 radio frequent da 65 Internet Processor Il ASIC COMPONENEONM SPM ae tos ponia rast
40. 3 Press the power switch for both power supplies to the OFF 0 position The switches are on the circuit breaker box 4 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 5 Disconnect any external devices connected to the CIP For instructions see Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 146 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 146 and Replace Alarm Relay Wires on page 147 6 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screw at each end of the CIP faceplate 7 Grasp the CIP and slide it out of the chassis Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat A CAUTION Be sure to slide the CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the connector pins on the front of the midplane Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables Replacing Hardware Components Figure 64 Removing the CIP 7 SII x p gt DI SC Ems Installing the CIP To install the CIP follow this procedure see Figure 65 1 Verify that the router is powered down 2 Carefully insert the rear of the CIP into
41. 3 Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86 4 Press and hold the offline button on the PCG faceplate until the amber LED labeled FAIL lights which takes about 3 seconds Keep in mind that if you are removing the master PCG forwarding halts while the Packet Forwarding Engine resets so that the components start using the clock signal from the other PCG which becomes the master For more information see Replacing a PCG on page 176 5 Loosen the thumbscrew at the lower right corner of the PCG faceplate using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 6 Grasp the thumbscrew and slide the PCG about halfway out of the chassis AN CAUTION Be careful to slide the PCG straight out of the chassis to avoid bending any of the pins on the underside of the board 7 Place one hand under the PCG to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Figure 90 Removing a PCG Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components MN 177 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 178 Installing a PCG To install a PCG follow this procedure see Figure 91 I Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on t
42. 4 REV 10 710 001882 HA9606 FPC Type 0C192 PU REV 05 710 001217 AV8340 Cc 0 REV 06 750 003184 HA9606 1x OC 192 SM SR 2 5 REV 10 710 001255 AH0357 FPC Type 1 PU REV 01 710 004600 BD2316 So REV 02 750 003104 AD9192 4x T3 ATM C 1 REV 05 750 005656 BE1888 2x EIA 530 c 2 REV 04 750 003105 AS6972 4x E3 ATM 3 REV 04 750 001895 HD8100 1x OC 12 SONET MM 6 REV 04 710 003950 BCO951 E FPC Type 2 PU REV 01 710 004600 AE9024 Cc 0 REV 05 750 001900 AD5625 1x OC 48 SONET SMSR Most components also have a small rectangular serial number ID label see Figure 109 attached to the component body Figure 109 Serial Number ID Label 256 TIT AD6003 1600 The following sections describe the label location on each type of component CIP Serial Number ID Label on page 257 Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label on page 257 DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label on page 258 FPC Serial Number ID Label on page 259 MCS Serial Number ID Label on page 259 PCG Serial Number ID Label on page 260 PIC Serial Number ID Label on page 260 Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label on page 261 SFM Serial Number ID Label on page 262 Locating Component Serial Numbers CIP Serial Number ID Label Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware The serial number ID label on the CIP is located at the top of the left side as shown in Figure 110 Figure 110 CIP Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label LAD a
43. 4 in 6 mm for removing craft interface 5 32 in Allen hexagonal wrench for tightening the mounting screws provided in the accessory box do not substitute a metric size wrench Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats one for each electronic component removed Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Removing Components from the Chassis 84 To make the router light enough to install without a mechanical lift you must remove most of the components Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift WARNING The procedures in this section apply only to initial installation and assume that you have not yet connected power to the router If power is connected completely disconnect it before continuing See Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 If you are installing or replacing components in an operational router see Replacing Hardware Components on page 139 Do not stack components on top of one another after removing them from the chassis Place each one individually on a flat stable surface either on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag Set the removed components far enough away from the installation site that they will not be in the way as you lift the chassis into the rack Perform the procedures described in the following sections to remove components from the chassis first from the rear and then from the front m Removing the Powe
44. ALARM Temperature sensor failure Power supplies PEM pem ID Removed YELLOW ALARM PEM pem ID Removed PEM pem ID High RED ALARM PEM pem ID High Temperature Temp PEM aaa Output Fail RED ALARM PEM Ee Output Failure PEM pem ID PEM pem D Input Fail Fail RED ALARM PEM pem ID RED ALARM PEM pem D Input Failure Failure SFM sfm number RED ALARM SFM sfm number Failure displayed Failure only if no alternate SFM is housed in chassis SFM sfm number RED ALARM SFM sfm number Removed Removed displayed only if no alternate SFM is housed in chassis Host modules Host host number RED ALARM Host host number Failure Failure Host host number RED ALARM Host host number Removed Removed Craft Failure YELLOW ALARM Craft Failure Table 27 SONET SDH Interface Alarm Messages 210 interface name so x x x LRDI interface name so x x x SONET line remote defect indicator interface name so x x x PAIS interface name so x x x SONET path AIS interface name so x x x PLL interface name so x x x SONET PLL lock interface name so x x x PMIS interface name so x x x SONET path mismatch interface name so x x x PRDI interface name so x x x REI Overview of Troubleshooting Resources interface name so x x x SONET path remote defect indicator interface name so x x x SONET remote error indicator Troubleshooting Hardware Components interface name so x x x SEF interface name so x x
45. ASIC passes notification of the forwarding decision for each packet to an I O Manager ASIC so that data cells for the outgoing packet can be reassembled for transmission to the network Transfer of exception and control packets The Internet Processor II ASIC passes exception packets to the microprocessor on the SFM which processes almost all of them The SFM sends any remaining exception packets to the Routing Engine for further processing When the SFM detects an error originating in the Packet Forwarding Engine it sends it to the Routing Engine using system logging syslog messages SFM Components Each SFM is a two board system as shown in Figure 8 It has the following components Two Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs Process incoming and outgoing packets one distributes data cells which the I O Manager ASIC on each FPC derives from incoming packets to the shared memory buffers on the Packet Forwarding Engine Hardware Component Overview FPCs while the second forwards notification of routing decisions to the I O Manager ASICs One Internet Processor II ASIC Performs route lookups and makes routing decisions Parity protected SSRAM Stores the forwarding table Processor subsystem Manages SFM functions and handles exception packets The processor has the following components One PowerPC 603e processor Parity protected Level 2 cache Parity protected DRAM EEPROM Stores the serial number and revision level
46. Command Reference For each power supply press the power switch on the circuit breaker box to the OFF 0 position NOTE If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a time wait at least 60 seconds after turning it off before turning it back on If you need to power it off again wait for at least 60 seconds after powering it on Shut off the power flowing from both external power sources so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screws securing the protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Remove the cover Using a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench loosen the outer nut securing the cable lug to each terminal stud Remove the outer nuts and washers leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench Slide the cable lug off of each t
47. Components m 133 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables 134 To maintain PICs and PIC cables follow these guidelines Check the LEDs on PIC faceplates Most PIC faceplates have an LED labeled STATUS Some PICs have additional LEDs often one per port The meaning of the LED states differs for various PICs For more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide If the FPC that houses the PIC detects a PIC failure the FPC generates an alarm message to be sent to the Routing Engine Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic status command The PIC slots in an FPC are numbered from O through 3 top to bottom user host gt show chassis fpc pic status Slot 0 Online 0 4x OC 3 SONET MM 1 1x CSTM1 SMIR 3 2x OC 3 ATM MM Slot 1 Online P 1x OC 12 SONET MM 1x OC 12 ATM MM 2x OC 3 ATM MM 2x OC 3 ATM MM p p p ana Q000 WNRo P P p For further description of the output from the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference Use the cable management system shown in Figure 21 to support cables and prevent cables from dislodging or developing stress points Place excess cable out of the way in the cable management system Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle from the connector or cable management system because this stresses the cable at the fastening point Putting fasteners on the loops helps to maintain their shape K
48. E System Overview This chapter provides an overview of the Juniper Networks M160 Internet router discussing the following topics m System Description on page 5 W Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 W System Redundancy on page 4 m Safety Requirements Warnings and Guidelines on page 5 System Description The M160 Internet router is a complete routing system that provides SONET SDH ATM Ethernet and channelized interfaces for large networks and network applications such as those supported by Internet service providers ISPs Application specific integrated circuits ASICs a definitive part of the router design enable the router to forward data at the high speeds demanded by current network media The router accommodates up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs which can each be configured with a variety of network media types altogether providing up to 32 OC 12 STM 4 32 OC 48 STM 16 or eight OC 192 STM 64 ports per system The router height of 35 in 89 cm enables stacked installation of two M160 systems in a single floor to ceiling rack for increased port density per unit of floor space The router s maximum aggregate throughput is 160 gigabits per second Gbps simplex or 80 Gbps full duplex The router provides very high throughput for any combination of Physical Interface Cards PICs that does not exceed 3 Gbps on an FPC1 or 10 Gbps on an FPC2 A combination that exceeds these numbers is supported but con
49. EFE iso 176 REMOVING BEEN dt 176 Installing a PCG sirun na ebe EE du utente sts 178 R placinga PIO ts e equ Ho e Ra e 179 Removing a PIG suit a voe e b o RUE e eb NER e bios 179 Installing a PIO ai de teet pe eee e dH ed Re Rita ona 181 Replace PIC Gables deeler Zeie soe tete Uo as sia eit 185 REMOVING a PIE Cable cia A ENEMIES 185 Installing a PIG Cable rotar eod RR bbs 186 Replacing an SEM o tenn eae didum e EET E VE E M Ere tuse 188 REMOVING an SEM eege ue et dejalo Ee e mudos 188 Iristalling ar SEM ee neen e das 189 Replace an SEP aE d ee E eee he 1h 190 REMOVING SEP cose ce deduc otto ws ee a ap dio Ae qund 190 Installing an SRE ett saint atari Deut et Habes 191 Replacing Power System COMPONENTS ooooccccccnccnnnn cnn cnn nc 193 Replacing the Circuit Breaker BOX etse tec ld dentures thio 193 Removing the Circuit Breaker Box 193 Installing the Circuit Breaker Box 195 Replacing a Power BODEN aes ea a dee 197 Removing a Power Supply ice e x AE Me A een os 197 Installing a Power SUpply ee ete ata eise 199 Disconnecting and Connecting Power 200 Disconnecting Power from the Rouer 200 Connecting Power to the ROUTED eee eee 202 Replacing a Fuse eoe oda dee e Ex e p pe dame E tit 204 Table of Contents W ix M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Hardware Components 207 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources 0 eee ences Command Line Interfaces isle d b hx wee Ve AE idos
50. Equipment E EMC AS NZS 3548 Class A Australia New Zealand EN 55022 Class A Emissions Europe FCC Part 15 Class A USA VCCI Class A Japan E Immunity EN 61000 5 2 Power Line Harmonics EN 61000 4 2 ESD EN 61000 4 5 Radiated Immunity EN 61000 4 4 EFT EN 61000 4 5 Surge EN 61000 4 6 Low Frequency Common Immunity EN 1000 4 11 Voltage Dips and Sags E ETSI ETS 500586 2 Telecommunication Network Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements m NEBS GR 63 Core NEBS Physical Protection GR 1089 Core EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications Equipment SR 3580 NEBS Criteria Levels Level 3 Compliance Agency Approvals WM 253 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada European Community This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Japan COMB VILA A J tk red TORE RIERA CEATA EEREMERSIAESIIENBO ES TORA REANUDAR zeu2olosksnaccm o0rz4j VCCI A The preceding translates as This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures VCCI A United States The router has been tes
51. HN Replacing Cooling System Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 80 Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly cd 1934 Replacing Host Module Components Replacing an MCS For instructions on replacing host module components see the following sections W Replacing an MCS on page 159 W Removing and Insert the PC Card on page 163 W Replacing a Routing Engine on page 165 The MCSs are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 For a description of the effect of removing an MCS see Host Module on page 22 To replace an MCS perform the following procedures W Removing an MCS on page 159 W Installing an MCS on page 161 Removing an MCS To remove an MCS follow this procedure see Figure 81 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Replacing Host Module Components m 159 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 160 3 Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86 4
52. Hardware Components NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference 2 For each power supply press the power switch on the circuit breaker box to the OFF 0 position NOTE If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a time wait at least 60 seconds after turning it off before turning it back on If you need to power it off again wait for at least 60 seconds after powering it on 3 Shut off the power flowing from both external power sources so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screws securing the protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Remove the cover 5 Using a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench loosen the outer nut securing the cable lug to each terminal stud Remove the outer nuts and washers leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench 6 Slide the cable lug off of each terminal stud Leave the inner washer and nut on ea
53. Houses the ASICs connectors and processor subsystem Four I O Manager ASICs Parse Layer 2 and Layer 3 data and perform encapsulation and segmentation The I O Manager ASICs divide incoming packets into 64 byte data cells for easier processing and reassemble the cells for each packet after the forwarding decision is made for it Enhanced FPCs have I O Manager ASICs capable of enhanced quality of service Two Packet Director ASICs Transfer packets between the PICs and the I O Manager ASICs one directs incoming packets from the PICs to the I O Manager ASICs while the second directs outgoing packets from the I O Manager ASICs to the PICs Eight identical synchronous DRAM SDRAM dual inline memory modules DIMMs Form the memory pool shared with the other FPCs installed in the router Parity protected synchronous SRAM SSRAM Stores data structures used by the I O Manager ASICs Processor subsystem Manages packet handling in the FPC and communication with the SFM It is a PowerPC 603e based CPU with parity protected DRAM EEPROM Stores the serial number and revision level of the FPC Two LEDs Indicate FPC status The LED labeled OK is green and the one labeled FAIL is red The LEDs for each FPC are located on the router craft interface For more information see FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 51 Offline button Prepares the FPC for removal from the router when pressed Like the LEDs an offline button is lo
54. IP networks that uses the shortest path first algorithm SPF algorithm also called the Dijkstra algorithm to determine routes OSPF Open Shortest Path First version 2 is an IGP developed for IP networks by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF OSPF is a link state protocol that makes routing decisions based on the SPF algorithm RIP Routing Information Protocol version 2 is an IGP for IP networks based on the Bellman Ford algorithm RIP is a distance vector protocol RIP dynamically routes packets between a subscriber and a service provider without the subscriber having to configure BGP or to participate in the service provider s IGP discovery process W Multicast routing protocols DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a dense mode flood and prune multicast routing protocol IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol versions 1 and 2 is used to manage membership in multicast groups MSDP Multicast Source Discovery Protocol enables multiple PIM sparse mode domains to be joined A rendezvous point RP in a PIM sparse mode domain has a peering relationship with an RP in another domain thereby discovering multicast sources from other domains PIM sparse mode and dense mode Protocol Independent Multicast is a multicast routing protocol used to route traffic to multicast groups that might span wide area and interdomain internetworks In PIM sparse mode routers explicitly join and leave multicast grou
55. Klasse 1 Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1 Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1 Aviso Produto laser de classe 1 jAtenci n Producto l ser Clase I Varning Laserprodukt av klass 1 Class 1 LED Product Warning WARNING Class 1 LED product Safety Guidelines and Warnings WN 245 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 246 Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED product Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I Warnung Class 1 LED Produktwarnung Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1 Advarsel LED produkt i klasse 1 Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED Atenci n Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1 Varning Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1 Laser Beam Warning WARNING Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische instrumenten Varoitus l katso s teeseen l k tarkastele sit suoraan optisen laitteen avulla Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux ni l observer directement l aide d instruments optiques Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Ger ten pr fen Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi n usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo direttamente Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter Aviso N o olhe fixamente para o raio nem olhe para ele directamente com i
56. LICENSE TERMS 1 The Parties The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks Inc and its subsidiaries collectively Juniper and the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license s for use of the Software Customer collectively the Parties 2 The Software In this Agreement Software means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper supplied software and updates and releases of such software for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller 5 License Grant Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein Juniper grants to Customer a non exclusive and non transferable license without right to sublicense to use the Software in executable form only subject to the following use restrictions a Customer shall use the Software solely as embedded in and for execution on Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller unless the applicable Juniper documentation expressly permits installation on non Juniper equipment b Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees C Other Juniper documentation for the Software such as product purchase doc
57. Power Supplies Disconnection Warming Power Disconnection Wang TN Eemer Warnings Ee yf GR dacs as sue he uude Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings 00 c cece Chassis Lifting Guidelines sse Installation Instructions Warning isse Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings 5 004 Ramp Warning ccs tes dee et e ev ee AS a he Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings iiciin General Laser Safety Guidelines sees Class 1 Laser Product Warning cece Class T LED Product Warning cree e eeh ed anode err tbe X MW Table of Contents Part 5 Appendix B Appendix C Table of Contents Laser Bedi Warning evi vied Ee BER d Ed belt 246 Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning 5 247 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings 247 Battery Handling Warning rc de eR PS bens 248 Jewelry Removal Warning 0 cece eee eee 249 Lightning Activity Warning iiis 250 Operating Temperature Warning 0 251 Product Disposal Warning ciis 252 Agency Approvals sees st eee er ae 255 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements sss 254 Canada xc tein ei Seth ele ei Ue pL debet dU CI 254 European Community uersu E bles metti RIA TUE tia d 254 TP ipee eet tacite aeq bie Piet OR Add 254 United States A tee E ae ee tt edv de eU RAO nata t re tct d 254 Contacting Customer Support and Returning
58. Replacing Hardware Components Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports The ports on the CIP connect the Routing Engine to external management devices see Figure 66 Figure 66 Routing Engine Interface Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts E Routing Engine ports BITS input ports Alarm relay contacts DN 1204 To replace the cables that connect to the ports perform the procedures described in the following sections W Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 146 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables m 145 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide m Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 146 m Replace Alarm Relay Wires on page 147 Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out of band management connect an Ethernet cable with RJ 45 RJ 45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the CIP One such cable is provided with the router For cable specifications see Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 Follow this procedure 1 Ifa cable is already installed in the ETHERNET port for the relevant Routing Engine perform the following steps a Press the tab on the connector and pull the connector straight out of the port Figure 67 shows the connector b Disconnect the cable from the network device 2 Plug one e
59. The front impeller assembly which includes the craft interface is located at the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 The assembly weighs approximately 14 5 Ib 6 6 kg The assembly is hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 The craft interface is attached to the front of the front impeller assembly If you are removing the front impeller assembly to replace it and the replacement assembly does not have a craft interface already installed on it you must transfer the craft interface from the removed assembly to the replacement assembly Perform the procedures described in the following sections Removing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 151 Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly on page 152 Replacing Cooling System Components Replacing Hardware Components Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly on page 153 Installing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 154 If the replacement front impeller assembly already has a craft interface on it perform only the procedures in Removing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 151 and Installing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 154 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly To remove the front impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 71 ll 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic
60. bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation 10 mH Chassis Hardware Component Overview For further safety information see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 221 Table 5 summarizes physical specifications for the router chassis Table 5 Chassis Physical Specifications Description Chassis height 35 in 89 cm Chassis width 17 5 in 44 5 cm for sides of chassis Weight maximum configuration Weight minimum configuration 19 in 48 3 cm with front support posts and center mounting brackets Chassis depth 29 in 73 6 cm 370 5 lb 168 kg 190 Ib 86 kg Thermal output 9400 BTU hour Packet Forwarding Engine The Packet Forwarding Engine is a multicomponent system that uses application specific integrated circuits ASICs to perform Layer 2 and Layer 5 packet switching route lookups and packet forwarding The ASICs include the Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC Internet Processor II ASIC I O Manager ASIC Packet Director ASIC and media specific controller ASICs The Packet Forwarding Engine has the following components W Midplane Physically separates front and rear cavities inside the chassis distributes power from the power supplies and transfers packets and signals between router components which plug into it m Physical Interface Card PIC Physically co
61. bas Andee 102 ure 47 Reinstalling the Fan Tray stone Mens ead heh da 103 ure 48 Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly cece ees 104 ure 49 Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembhy cece eee ees 105 List of Figures NW xiii M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide xiv List of Figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig ure 72 ure 50 ure 51 ure 52 ure 53 ure 54 ure 55 ure 56 ure 57 ure 58 ure 59 ure 60 ure 61 ure 62 ure 63 ure 64 ure 65 ure 66 ure 67 ure 68 ure 69 ure 70 ure 71 Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembiv eee ees Reinstalling a Routing Engine s ossiepoct aes chats camaron era t te ee R installing a PCG x jon aeo AP SS RR e Reinstallingeam MES A EIUS Reinstalling an SEM ose sees p AAA EAS ee Reiristalling a Power Supply ssessarko eee t eres aaa atea Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector sss Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector csse Attaching Cable toia RIES 5 esiti peterent ENEE ed trate ch Connecting Power and Grounding Cales REMOVING The Air FIGUTS steet Aal EE E ENEE EE Removing the Filter from the Air Filter Cover Inst
62. button begins to blink Hold the button down until the LED goes out The LEDS and offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface W Issue the following CLI command user host gt request chassis fpc slot slot number offline For more information about the command see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management 5 Disconnect the cables from the PICs installed in the FPC If a PIC uses fiber optic cable immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable management system to prevent the cables from developing stress points A WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 6 If
63. complete the installation by connecting management and alarm devices PICs and power cables This chapter has the following sections Tools and Parts Required on page 111 Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 112 Connecting PIC Cables on page 115 Providing Power to the Router on page 117 Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software on page 121 Tools and Parts Required To connect the router to management devices and PICs and to power on the router you need the following tools and parts Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver 7 16 in hexagonal head external drive socket wrench or nut driver with a minimum of 30 Ib in 5 5 Nm tightening torque for tightening nuts to terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Tools and Parts Required m 111 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide AN CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench E Wire cutters B Pliers m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices After you have installed the router into the rack attach one or more external devices to the ports on the CIP that connect to the Routing Engines for management and service operations see Figure 56 For specifications for the cable accepted by the Routing Engine
64. component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner to secure it to the chassis For complete instructions see Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109 AN CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place 164 1H Replacing Host Module Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 84 Insert the PC Card 1925 Replacing a Routing Engine The Routing Engines are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 For a description of the effect of removing a Routing Engine see Host Module on page 22 To replace a Routing Engine perform the following procedures W Removing a Routing Engine on page 165 W Installing a Routing Engine on page 168 Removing a Routing Engine To remove a Routing Engine follow this procedure see Figure 85 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 5 Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis For complete instructions see R
65. craft interface that is labeled FPCO Locate the FPC that you labeled FPCO during removal Verify that the ends of the ejector levers which are located at each end of the FPC are pushed outward nearly perpendicular to the face of the FPC Grasp the front of the FPC with one hand and place the other hand under the FPC to support it CAUTION When the FPC is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector levers bus bars or edge connectors They cannot support its weight Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 101 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 5 Align the rear bottom corners of the FPC with the guides at the bottom of the FPC slot Slide the FPC into the card cage until it contacts the midplane 6 Push the ends of the ejector levers inward until they are nearly flush with the face of the FPC 7 Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC to seat the FPC securely in the chassis 8 Repeat the procedure for each FPC proceeding from left to right through the slots with offline buttons labeled FPC1 through FPC7 on the craft interface Figure 46 Reinstalling an FPC Ejector levers 1193 Reinstalling the Fan Tray The fan tray which includes the cable management system is located on the front of the chassis just above the air filter as shown in Figure 1 To reinstall it follow
66. discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen the captive screw at each corner of the craft interface Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the gap around the craft interface and gently pry the impeller assembly forward until you can grasp the sides of the assembly and slide it halfway out of the chassis CAUTION To avoid injury as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch any part of the impeller behind the front panel the impeller might still be spinning Place one hand under the assembly to support it When the impeller is no longer spinning slide the assembly completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag If you are replacing the front impeller assembly and the replacement assembly has a craft interface panel installed on it proceed to Installing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 154 Otherwise proceed to Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly on page 152 Replacing Cooling System Components M 151 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 71 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly 152 Captive screw Removing the Craft Interface from the Front I
67. distance vector protocol RIP dynamically routes packets between a subscriber and a service provider without the subscriber having to configure BGP or to participate in the service provider s IGP discovery process Routing Engine Software Components JUNOS Internet Software Overview Routing and Forwarding Tables The primary function of the JUNOS routing protocol process is maintaining routing tables and using the information in them to determine active routes to network destinations It copies information about the active routes into the Routing Engine s forwarding table which the JUNOS kernel copies to the Packet Forwarding Engine By default the routing protocol process maintains the following routing tables and uses the information in each table to determine active routes to network destinations m Unicast routing table Stores routing information for all unicast protocols running on the router including BGP IS IS OSPF and RIP You can also configure additional routes such as static routes for inclusion in the routing table The unicast routing protocols use the routes in this table when advertising routing information to their neighbors In the unicast routing table the routing protocol process designates routes with the lowest preference values as active By default a route s preference value is simply a function of how the routing protocol process learned about the route You can modify the default preference value by
68. engineering protocols Provides a detailed explanation and configuration examples for several of the most complex features in the JUNOS software Provides an overview of the JUNOS software and describes how to install and upgrade the software This manual also describes how o configure system management functions and how to configure he chassis including user accounts passwords and redundancy Provides an overview of the network interface and class of service functions of the JUNOS software and describes how to configure he network interfaces on the router List of Technical Publications L xxi M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Multicast Protocols Provides an overview of multicast concepts and describes how to configure multicast routing protocols Network Management Provides an overview of network management concepts and describes how to configure various network management features such as SNMP accounting options and cflowd Policy Framework Provides an overview of policy concepts and describes how to configure routing policy firewall filters and forwarding options Routing Protocols Provides an overview of routing concepts and describes how to configure routing routing instances and unicast routing protocols Services Interfaces Provides an overview of the services interfaces functions of the JUNOS software and describes how to configure the services interfaces on the router VPNs Provides an overview and describ
69. follow the guidelines for working with and near electrical equipment as well as the safety procedures for working with Internet routers For a discussion of how to make the installation site a safe environment see Preparing for Router Installation on page 59 For a list of safety warnings see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 221 and particularly Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 227 However providing an exhaustive set of guidelines for working with electrical equipment is beyond the scope of this manual Safety Requirements Warnings and Guidelines 5 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 6 m Safety Requirements Warnings and Guidelines Chapter 2 Hardware Component Overview Chassis This chapter provides an overview of the hardware components on the M160 Internet router m Chassis on page 7 m Packet Forwarding Engine on page 11 W Host Module on page 22 W Craft Interface on page 27 W Connector Interface Panel CIP on page 32 m Power System on page 35 W Cooling System on page 39 m Cable Management System on page 41 The router chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the other hardware components The chassis is 17 5 in 44 5 cm wide and 29 in 73 6 cm deep The chassis height of 35 in 89 cm enables stacked installation of two M160 routers in a single floor to ceiling rack For more information see Rack Requirements on page 59 The two front s
70. follow this procedure see Figure 75 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 3 Grasp the thumbscrews at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the assembly halfway out of the chassis AN CAUTION To avoid injury as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch any part of the impeller behind the front panel the impeller might still be spinning 4 When the impeller is no longer spinning slide the assembly completely out of the chassis Figure 75 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 1914 Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly To install the rear lower impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 76 Replacing Cooling System Components M 155 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Orient the impeller so that the label
71. gt request chassis pic fpc slot fpc slot pic slot pic slot offline For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference Disconnect the cables from the PIC If the PIC uses fiber optic cable immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose Unscrew the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate simultaneously and at about the same rate unscrewi
72. if necessary Grasp the handle or handles on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis Place one hand under the power supply to support it then slide it completely out of the chassis Repeat the procedure to remove the second power supply Figure 32 Removing a Power Supply g001918 Removing the Rear Component Cover 86 The rear component cover protects the SFMs Routing Engines MCSs and PCGs as shown in Figure 2 To remove it follow this procedure 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Removing Components from the Chassis EH 3 Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the component cover using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary Pull the cover straight off the chassis AN CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place Removing the SFMs The router can have an SFM in each of the slots labeled SFM O through SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 Each SFM weighs approximately 5 Ib 2 3 kg To remove an SFM follow this procedure
73. implementation of SNMP to monitor routers The SNMP software consists of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent It provides full support for MIB II SNMP version 1 traps and version 2 notifications SNMP version 1 Get and GetNext requests and version 2 GetBulk requests For more information about SNMP see the JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide The software also supports tracing and logging operations which you can use to track normal router operations error conditions and the packets that the router generates or forwards Logging operations use a syslog like mechanism to record systemwide high level events such as interfaces going up or down and user logins on the router Tracing operations record more detailed information about the operation of routing protocols such as the various types of routing protocol packets sent and received and routing policy actions Software Upgrades 50 The router is delivered with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled To upgrade the software you use CLI commands to copy a set of software images over the network to memory storage on the Routing Engine The JUNOS Internet software set consists of several images provided in individual packages or as a bundle You normally upgrade all packages simultaneously For information about installing and upgrading JUNOS software see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Software Upgrades System Architecture Overview The router architecture
74. irem nts A A AA Ged Ad 59 Rack Size and Sener teca elisa scia d 60 Spacing of Mounting Holes cnn cnn cnn 61 Connection to Building Structure 62 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance 62 Routing Node Environmental Specifications sss 62 Fire Safety Requirerments c m va pace de ect rep PUE EE RENI wera ae 65 vi W Table of Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Table of Contents Eire SuppEeSSIOFLt sever tas EE 63 Fire Suppression Eoupment cnc en 64 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications sss 64 site Electrical Wiring Guidelines codecs tees duals teu ee sere bbe ads 65 Distance Limitations for Signaling sse 65 Radio Frequency Interference iiis 65 Electromagnetic Compatibility csse 65 Router Power Requirements a sepe rh ERR e e ERRARE LEES 65 Chassis Grounding iss eee e eerta eie mE Reo tang gp UR IOUP ae 67 Power Connection and Cable Specifications isses 67 Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines sssssssssssuse 70 Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications 0oooooocccccccccccccrcnoo 71 Signal Loss in Multimode and Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable 71 Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber Optic Cable 000 00 002 71 Calculating Power Budget for Fiber Optic Cable 72 Calculating Power Margin for Fiber Optic Cable csiicriicricrri 73 Attenuating to Pre
75. is on the top Align the rails on the upper edges of the impeller assembly with the guides inside the chassis 3 Push the impeller assembly up and to the right to start it into the chassis then slide it all the way in 4 Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover Figure 76 Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly Label USE GUIDES WHEN INSTALLING BLOWER ASSEMBLY gt Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly The rear upper impeller assembly is located at the upper left of the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 It weighs about 4 Ib 1 8 kg The assembly is hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 To replace it perform the following procedures m Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 157 W Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 158 156 1H Replacing Cooling System Components Replacing Hardware Components Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly To remove the rear upper impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 77 and Figure 78 which show the two types of impeller that can be installed 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen t
76. is transferred between the routing protocols and the routing table This section discusses the following topics W IPv4 Routing Protocols on page 44 W IPv6 Routing Protocols on page 46 W Routing and Forwarding Tables on page 47 W Routing Policy on page 47 For complete information about routing concepts see the JUNOS Internet software configuration guides IPv4 Routing Protocols The JUNOS Internet software implements full IP routing functionality providing support for IP version 4 IPv4 The routing protocols are fully interoperable with existing IP routing protocols and provide the scale and control necessary for the Internet core The software provides support for the following routing and traffic engineering protocols W Unicast routing protocols BGP Border Gateway Protocol version 4 is an Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP that guarantees loop free exchange of routing information between routing domains also called autonomous systems BGP in conjunction Routing Engine Software Components JUNOS Internet Software Overview with JUNOS routing policy provides a system of administrative checks and balances that can be used to implement peering and transit agreements ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method that hosts can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet IS IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System is a link state interior gateway protocol IGP for
77. m ste godk nda ledningskontakter anv ndas t ex kabelsko av sluten eller ppen typ med uppatvand tapp Storleken p dessa kontakter m ste vara avpassad till ledningarna och m ste kunna h lla b de isoleringen och ledaren fastkl mda Grounded Equipment Warning WARNING The router is intended to be grounded Ensure that the router is connected to earth ground during normal use Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden Varoitus T m laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi Varmista ett is nt laite on yhdistetty maahan normaalik yt n aikana Attention Cet quipement doit tre reli la terre S assurer que l appareil h te est reli la terre lors de l utilisation normale Warnung Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden Stellen Sie sicher da amp das Host Ger t w hrend des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist Safety Guidelines and Warnings mm 235 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 236 Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt bruk Aviso Este equipamento dever estar ligado a terra Certifique se que o host se encontra ligado a terra durante a sua utilizac o normal Atenci n Este equipo debe conect
78. management ports see Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 112 m Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration Figure 56 Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts HOS ETHERNET acr YECTO GRN 1000 0 CONSOLE D o AUXILIARY HOST Routing euer Engine ports G H T gt CONSOLE 2 ep o e E o n BITS A input ports o O be du F Be arm relay contacts ix o E 1204 To connect external devices to the Routing Engine management ports perform the procedures described in the following sections W Connecting to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 114 W Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 114 W Connecting to an External Alarm Reporting Device on page 115 Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices M 113 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Connecting to a Network for Out of Band Management To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out of band management connect an Ethernet cable with RJ 45 RJ 45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the CIP One such cable is provided with the router For cable specifications see Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 Follow this procedure 1 Turn off the pow
79. market f use any locked or key restricted feature function or capability without first purchasing the applicable license s and obtaining a valid key from Juniper even if such feature function or capability is enabled without a key g distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party h use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller i use the Software on non Juniper equipment where the Juniper documentation does not expressly permit installation on non Juniper equipment j use the Software or make it available for use on Juniper equipment that the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller or k use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein 5 Audit Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement Upon request by Juniper Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement 6 Confidentiality The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper As such Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use t
80. on page 226 2 Grasp the sides of the impeller assembly and align the rear of the assembly with the guides inside the chassis 5 Slide the impeller assembly all the way into the chassis 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver tighten the captive screw at each corner of the craft interface Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Figure 45 Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly Reinstalling the FPCs Captive screw The FPCs install into the card cage at the front of the chassis as shown in Figure 1 gt NOTE To help you work systematically the following procedure directs you to reinstall FPCs starting at the left side of the card cage and working toward the right You can install FPCs in any order however Be sure there is a blank panel over every empty slot The blank panels must be in place during router operation to guarantee adequate circulation of cooling air To reinstall the FPCs follow this procedure see Figure 46 L Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Locate the leftmost slot in the FPC card cage on the front of the chassis It is directly below the offline button on the
81. ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de energia desligue o cabo de alimentac o nas unidades de corrente alternada desligue a corrente no disjuntor nas unidades de corrente cont nua jAtenci n Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentaci n desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n en los equipos de corriente alterna CA cortar la alimentaci n desde el interruptor autom tico en los equipos de corriente continua CC Varning Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller n ra str mf rs rjningsenheter skall du f r v xelstr msenheter dra ur n tsladden och f r likstr msenheter bryta str mmen vid versp nningsskyddet TN Power Warning WARNING The router is designed to work with TN IT power systems Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN IT energiesystemen Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN IT sahkovoimajarjestelmien yhteydess Attention Ce dispositif a t con u pour fonctionner avec des syst mes d alimentation TN Warnung Das Ger t ist f r die Verwendung mit TN IT Stromsystemen ausgelegt Avvertenza Il dispositivo stato progettato per l uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN IT Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN IT stromsystemer Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN IT Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Atenci
82. page 267 Tools and Parts Required 264 To remove components from the router or the router from a rack you need the following tools and parts 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver for detaching alarm relay terminal block 5 32 in Allen hexagonal wrench for loosening the mounting screws that secure the router to the rack do not substitute a metric size wrench 7 16 in hexagonal head external drive socket wrench or nut driver with a minimum of 50 Ib in 3 5 Nm tightening torque for loosening nuts from terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Tools and Parts Required Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware AN CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench Blank panels to cover empty slots Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats one for each electronic component removed Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1 4 in 6 mm for removing craft interface Mechanical lift if available Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 Rubber safety cap for fiber optic PICs or PIC cable Packing the Routing Node for Shipment To pack the router for shipment follow this procedure 1 Retrieve the shipping crate and packing materials in which the router was originally shipped If you do not have these materials co
83. quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC mettere l interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione Advarsel For noen av disse prosedyrene utfores kontroller at strommen er frakoblet likestromkretsen S rg for at all strom er sl tt AV Dette gj res ved lokalisere strombryteren p brytertavlen som betjener likestremkretsen sla strombryteren AV og teipe bryterhandtaket p strembryteren i AV stilling Safety Guidelines and Warnings W 231 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 232 Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos certifique se que desligou a fonte de alimentac o de energia do circuito de corrente cont nua Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de corrente cont nua e coloque o na posic o OFF Desligado segurando nessa posic o a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora Atenci n Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos comprobar que la alimentaci n del circuito de corriente continua CC est cortada OFF Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentaci n est cortada OFF localizar el interruptor autom tico en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua cambiar el interruptor autom tico a la posici n de Apagado OFF y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor autom tico en posici n de Apagado OFF Varning Innan du utf r n gon av f ljande procedurer m ste d
84. r du utf rer arbeid p utstyr m du vare oppmerksom p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser inneb rer samt gj re deg kjent med vanlig praksis n r det gjelder unng ulykker Aviso Este s mbolo de aviso indica perigo Encontra se numa situa o que Ihe poder causar danos f sicos Antes de come ar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento familiarize se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos el ctricos e com quaisquer pr ticas comuns que possam prevenir poss veis acidentes Atenci n Este s mbolo de aviso significa peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad f sica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considerar los riesgos que entra a la corriente el ctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos est ndar de prevenci n de accidentes Varning Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete p n gon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanligt f rfarande f r att f rebygga skador Safety Guidelines and Warnings 222 This section lists safety guidelines and warnings for installing operating and maintaining the router W General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 224 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 227 Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 239 Laser and LED Safety Guidelin
85. router is a positive ground system you must connect the positive lead to the terminal labeled RTN the negative lead to the terminal labeled 48V and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points Copper Conductors Warning A WARNING Use copper conductors only Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders Varoitus Kayta vain kuparijohtimia Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschlie lich Kupferleiter Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Aviso Utilize apenas fios condutores de cobre Atenci n Emplee s lo conductores de cobre Varning Anv nd endast ledare av koppar DC Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit To ensure that all power is off locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient draait de stroo
86. show chassis environment pem 37 Show chassis DCi og cork tea cad Pa ter ett eod 16 for FPG status cc ce eS ter dei edes 55 show chassis fpc pic stanmus eeii 34 show chassis hardware sse 255 show chassis routing engine 51 show chassis fm 56 CraCeTOUlt voii desees ie sage enses Rain 207 comments in configuration statements xxi compatibility electromagnetic 5 22 65 compliance EMC requirements secesecee repre estes 254 general Standards 255 components hardware See hardware components hot pluggable See field replaceable units hot removable and hot insertable See field replaceable units TEGUNGANCY eiii de epe d de ee 4 requiring power down See field replaceable units software See JUNOS Internet software configuration files storage by Routing Engine 54 OU ri 121 Connector Interface Panel See CIP console port for Routing Engine management cable connection during initial installation 114 connector pinouts DB 9 270 replacement instructions i 146 Specifications essc waren eens 74 tools requited oo andes tomar deme dta 139 descriptas rad E geet MEER RU epe 33 control packets handling of 19 conventions lee xix TEXTO SMA ta rece es nd Tes es XX Cooling Systerti EENHEETEN Ente T bes 40 description hardware and function 40 Mantenan Eer
87. specifications see the following sections W Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 65 W Router Power Requirements on page 65 W Chassis Grounding on page 67 W Power Connection and Cable Specifications on page 67 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Preparing for Router Installation Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines When planning the electrical wiring at your site consider the factors discussed in the following sections Distance Limitations for Signaling Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference In addition the potential for damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances or if wires pass between buildings The electromagnetic pulse EMP caused by lightning can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices If your site has previously experienced such problems you might want to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding Radio Frequency Interference You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference RFI from your site wiring by using twisted pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors If you must exceed the recommended distances use a high quality twisted pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable Electromagnetic Compatibility If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility EMC particularly from lightning or radio transmitte
88. supply connectors fo 197 Miscellaneous Control Subsystem See MCS modal dispersion in fiber optic cable 71 mode loss higher order ice ot eerte ex dea so seas lek 71 MPLS protocols 2 aet ae tame POPE Vr daier e 44 multicast routing protocols eee 44 multimode fiber optic cable See cable fiber optic N NEBS standards z 5 4 nue deer hee PE Reis 255 network cable See cable fiber optic cable PIC NOUCEHCONSS ceras t lett ag n A SOT EIS xix o offline button lj cT 51 MOS Ad ete e or rt o VE CHR ete da 26 oc 19 PIG ctos isst oie AMNEM M RU Ramee wale en ets 15 SEM Seres ves aae he et eas 20 284 m Index P Packet Director ASIC component on EB efte eia edits role in forwarding ciis Packet Forwarding Engine architectural components sssssssssssss ASICS EE ln EE Clock Generator See PCG data flow through cicer tret trend hardware components listed packing crate See shipping crate parentheses in syntax descriptions PC card insertion instructions ee Sg E e removal instr ctioNS 0 eee eee PCG COMPONEN ET description hardware and function installation instructions during initial installation for maintenance or replacement maintenance uidisse verse bee ee reed net d offline DUO ise ete ete ser Ptole removal instructions during initial installation
89. sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Place one hand under the MCS to support it and grasp one of the extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 107 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 3 4 Align the rear of the MCS with the guides inside the chassis and slide it in completely Press the extractor clip at each end of the MCS inward If there is a second MCS repeat the procedure to reinstall it Figure 53 Reinstalling an MCS Reinstalling the SFMs 108 Extractor clip The router can have an SFM in each of the slots labeled SFM O through SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 To reinstall an SFM follow this procedure see Figure 54 qx Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Verify that the ends of the ejector handles are pulled outward to a position nearly perpendicular to the faceplate of the SFM Place one hand under the SFM to support it and grasp one of the ejector handles at the front with the other hand Align the rear of the SFM with the guides
90. that might be installed later The JUNOS interface process communicates with the interface process in the Packet Forwarding Engine through the JUNOS kernel enabling the JUNOS Internet software to track the status and condition of router interfaces The JUNOS chassis process allows you to configure and control the properties of the router including conditions that trigger alarms and clock sources The chassis process communicates directly with a chassis process in the JUNOS kernel SNMP and MIB II Processes The JUNOS Internet software supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2 and 3 which provides a mechanism for monitoring the state of the router This software is controlled by the JUNOS SNMP and Management Information Base MIB II processes which consist of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent Management Process The management process starts all the other JUNOS software processes and the CLI when the router boots It monitors the running JUNOS processes and makes all reasonable attempts to restart any process that terminates Routing Engine Kernel The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS software processes It also provides the link between the routing tables maintained by the routing protocol process and the forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine Additionally it coordinates communication with the Packet Forwarding Engine which primarily involves sy
91. the former master s configuration For the most predictable performance configure the two Routing Engines identically except for parameters unique to a Routing Engine such as the hostname defined at the edit system hierarchy level and the management interface fxpO or equivalent defined at the edit interfaces hierarchy level To configure Routing Engine specific parameters and still use the same configuration on both Routing Engines include the appropriate configuration statements under the reO and re1 statements at the edit groups hierarchy level and use the apply groups statement For instructions see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide 6 On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine you are removing enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command The command shuts down the Routing Engine cleanly so its state information is preserved user host gt request system halt Replacing Host Module Components Replacing Hardware Components gt NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference 7 Using your thumbs push and hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge of the unit Push the ends of the extractor clips outward to unseat the Routing Engine from the chassis 8 Grasp the extr
92. the procedure Verify that the power switch for the power supply located on the circuit breaker box is in the OFF 0 position Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Place one hand under the power supply and grasp a handle on the faceplate with the other hand Slide the power supply into the chassis until it contacts the midplane Starting with the bottom screws tighten but do not overtighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate Press the switch on the corresponding circuit breaker to the ON position Verify that on the power supply faceplate the green LED labeled CB ON lights steadily the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK blinks momentarily then lights steadily and the amber LED labeled CB OFF does not light ES NOTE After powering off a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on After powering on a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off Replacing Power System Components m 199 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence If the Routing Engine finishes booting an
93. x SONET severely errored frame interface name so x x x UNEQ interface name so x x x SONET unequipped Blown Fuse Indicators The router uses fuses from the Cooper Bussman brand GMT series for the FPCs MCSs PCGs and SFMs They are located in a fuse box on the rear of the midplane When the fuse for a component blows the component stops functioning even though it is installed correctly and the power supplies are still providing power to the router Figure 107 shows the location in the fuse box of the fuse for each component The labels shown in the figure do not appear on the actual fuses the clear cover on every fuse reads BUSS GMT X but a table on the surface of the midplane below the fuse box displays the same information Figure 107 Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box J243 Jo42 J244 J241 1240 ABCD ABCDABCDABOD Ge st lest LIL 1 Jet let s FPC2 15A A ass sas ee 35 35 FPCI 15A B alleles ese EEE Ss FPCO 15A C 0 0 oz S x o o JU A SUME SIEGE ES 53535 Seles SCC When a fuse has blown but the power supplies are still delivering power to router the amber LED adjacent to the fuse lights For vertically oriented fuses in the groups labeled J241 through J244 in Figure 107 the LED is located below the fuse for horizontally oriented fuses in the group labeled J240 it is to the left of the
94. you are transferring any PICs to a different FPC follow this procedure to remove them while the FPC is still installed a Unscrew the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate simultaneously and at about the same rate unscrewing the two screws alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the FPC slot making it difficult to turn the screws b Slide the PIC out of the slot and immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag 7 Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 8 Pull the ends of the ejector levers which are adjacent to the thumbscrews away from the face of the FPC until they are nearly perpendicular to it 9 Grasp the top and bottom flanges of the card carrier and slide the FPC about halfway out of the card cage 10 Place one hand around the front of the FPC the PIC housing and the other hand under it to support it Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag CAUTION The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end Be prepared to accept the full weight up to 29 Ib 13 2 kg as you slide the FPC out of the chassis When the FPC is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector levers bus bars or edge connectors They cannot support its weight Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal Place each one individually
95. 34 1618 Contacting Customer Support After you have located the serial numbers of the components you need to return contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC in one of the following ways You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day seven days a week m On the Web using the Case Manager link at 262 HN Contacting Customer Support Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware http www juniper net support m By telephone From the US and Canada 1 888 514 JTAC From all other locations 1 408 745 9500 If contacting JTAC by phone enter your 11 digit case number followed by the key if this is an existing case or press the key to be routed to the next available support engineer Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC Return Procedure When requesting support from JTAC by telephone be prepared to provide the following information W Your existing case number if you have one W Details of the failure or problem m Type of activity being performed on the router when the problem occurred W Configuration data using one or more of the show commands If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician an RMA is issued This number is used to track the returned material at the factory and to return repaired or new components to the customer as needed NOTE Do not return any component to Juniper Networks Inc unless you have first obtained an RMA number Juniper Networks Inc reserves the r
96. 8 V each W Power consumption for minimum configuration Base system 1 FPC 1 SFM 1 host module 2 PCGs 4 PICs 7A 2 A 1 3A 1 3A 2 0 2A 4 0 625 A 7A 2 4A 1 3A 1 3A 04A 2 5A 14 9 A 48 V 715 WDC W Power consumption for maximum configuration Base system 8 FPCs 4 SFMs 2 host modules 2 PCGs 32 PICs 10A 8 2 4 A A 1 3 A 2 1 3 A 2 0 2A 32 0 625A 10A 19 2A 5 2A 2 6A 0 4A 20A 57 4A 48V 2755 W DC W Input current from a DC source other than 48 V based on maximum configuration 54 VDC input x input current X 48 VDC input x input current Y 54 x X 48 x 57 4A X 48 x 57 4 A 54 51 0 A m System thermal output for maximally configured router 105 of Watts DC 0 293 BTU hr 1 05 x 2755 0 293 9873 BTU hr CS NOTE If you plan to operate a maximally configured router we recommend that you provision at least 70 A 48 VDC and use a facility circuit breaker rated for 70 A minimum Doing so enables you to operate the router in any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure and allows the router to function at full capacity using one power supply If you plan to operate the router at less than the maximum configuration and do not provision a 70 A circuit breaker we recommend that you provision a circuit breaker rated for at least 125 of the continuous current that the system draws at 48 V 66 m Power Guidelines Requirements and S
97. 9 4 0 32 T 39 2 Empty 3 Online 34 I 0 32 1 40 4 Empty 5 Online 35 4 0 32 2 40 6 Online 36 4 0 32 1 39 7 Empty For more detailed output add the detail option The following example also specifies a slot number 0 which is optional user host gt show chassis fpc detail 0 Slot 0 information State Online Temperature 37 degrees C 98 degrees F Total CPU DRAM 32 MB Total SRAM 4 MB Total SDRAM 256 MB O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number O0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number O0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number O0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number O0 Start time 2003 04 29 16 11 55 PDT Uptime 5 days 21 hours 32 minutes 41 seconds For further description of the output from the commands see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components Troubleshooting Hardware Components Troubleshooting PICs To troubleshoot the PICs follow these guidelines m To check the status of each port on a PIC look at the LED located on the PIC faceplate For information about the meaning of LED states on different PICs see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide W To check the status of a PIC issue the following CLI command The PIC slots in the FPC are numbered from O through 3 top to bottom
98. ARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components mM 173 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 174 interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes 9 Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each PIC on the FPC Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop using the cable management system Placing fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape A CAUTION Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point AN CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 10 Use one of the following methods to bring the FPC online W Press and hold the FPC offline button until the green OK LED next to the button lights steadily in about 5 seconds The LEDS and offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface m Issue the following CLI command user host gt request chassis fpc slot slot number online For more information about the command see the JUNO
99. C housing and the other hand under it to support it Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag CAUTION The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end Be prepared to accept the full weight up to 29 Ib 13 2 kg as you slide the FPC out of the chassis When the FPC is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector levers bus bars or edge connectors They cannot support its weight Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Repeat Step 4 for each FPC card carrier or blank cover proceeding from left to right Removing Components from the Chassis m 95 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 41 Removing an FPC Offline button a uy poss a Ejector levers e a Ge 1191 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly The front impeller assembly which includes the craft interface is located at the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 The assembly weighs approximately 14 5 Ib 6 6 kg To remove the front impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 42 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable su
100. C router Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen voor gelijkstroom toestellen dient u de stroom uit te schakelen bij de stroomverbreker Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ja katkaise tasavirtalaitteiden virta suojakytkimell ennen kuin teet mit n asennuspohjalle tai ty skentelet virtal hteiden l heisyydess Attention Avant de travailler sur un ch ssis ou proximit d une alimentation lectrique d brancher le cordon d alimentation des unit s en courant alternatif couper l alimentation des unit s en courant continu au niveau du disjoncteur Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 237 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 238 Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der N he von Netzger ten arbeiten ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw schalten Sie bei Gleichstromeinheiten den Strom am Unterbrecher ab Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle unit CA scollegare l alimentazione all interruttore automatico sulle unit CC Advarsel For det utfores arbeid p kabinettet eller det arbeides i naerheten av stramforsyningsenheter skal stromledningen trekkes ut p vekselstromsenheter og str mmen kobles fra ved strembryteren p likestremsenheter Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis
101. D See Craft Interface on page 27 Inspect the air filters at the bottom front and left rear of the router cleaning or replacing it as needed for optimum cooling system performance Do not run the router for more than a few minutes without the air filters in place For maintenance instructions see Maintaining the Air Filter on page 128 Maintaining Cooling System Components For instructions on maintaining cooling system components see the following sections Maintaining Cooling System Components m 127 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide m Maintaining the Air Filter on page 128 m Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers on page 130 Maintaining the Air Filter 128 Check the air filter regularly for dust and debris Clean or replace it as needed The air filter is hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Take note of the following caution however AN CAUTION Do not operate the router for more than a few minutes when the air filter has been removed The fans and impellers are powerful enough to draw in foreign material such as bits of wire through the unfiltered air intake which could damage router components To maintain the air filter perform the following procedures W Removing the Air Filter on page 128 m Cleaning the Air Filter on page 129 W Installing the Air Filter on page 129 Removing the Air Filter The air filter is located at the front of the chass
102. Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 8 Use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online W Press and hold the PIC offline button until the status LED on the PIC faceplate indicates normal functioning which usually takes about 5 seconds The LED is usually green for more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide For the PICs that install on an FPC1 the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier For the PICs that install on an FPC2 the offline button is on the PIC faceplate See Figure 6 W Issue the following CLI command user host gt request chassis pic fpc slot fpc slot pic slot pic slot online For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the PIC is online You can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic status command described in Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 154 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components m 183 M160 Intern
103. E The messages in the craft interface LCD and the output from CLI show commands refer to the power supply on the right as PEM 0 and the power supply on the left as PEM 1 A common cause of power supply shutdown is that the temperature of the power supply or another router component has exceed the maximum limit W Ifthe red alarm LED is not lit check that the power switch is in the ON position The switches are on the circuit breaker box 2 Replace the faulty power supply with a spare For instructions see Replacing a Power Supply on page 197 If the LEDs light correctly on the spare the original power supply is faulty Return it to Juniper Networks for replacement as described in Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255 Troubleshooting the Power System Troubleshooting Hardware Components If the spare power supply also does not work connect the router to a different power source You might also try replacing the power cord or cable For instructions see Disconnecting and Connecting Power on page 200 you do not need to disconnect and reconnect the grounding cable If you cannot determine the cause of the problem or need additional assistance see Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 212 Troubleshooting the Power System WM 217 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 218 Troubleshooting the Power System Part 4 Appendixes m Safety and Regulatory Compliance Infor
104. EREN 28 alarm relay contact wires 00005 47 cable auxiliary or console port for Routing Engine management ea roA e in paco 46 Ethernet port for Routing Engine DAN EEN 46 PE EEN Ee 85 Qi eet glas deg baaa 41 circuit breaker Dos c de ee ane 93 craft interfaces tuto 52 Index WM 285 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide fan tray during initial installation 93 for maintenance or replacement 148 FPC during initial installation 94 for maintenance or replacement 170 front impeller assembly during initial installation ooo 96 for maintenance or replacement 151 USES voor bere teste beato Pen rite d 204 MCS during initial installation ooo 88 for maintenance or replacement 159 IN O 165 PCG during initial installation ooo 89 for maintenance or replacement 176 PICs b dee d e ed are Eo 179 power and grounding cables 200 power supply during initial installation 86 for maintenance or replacement 197 rear Component GEET co kords dar ria 86 rear lower impeller assembly during initial installation 92 for maintenance or replacement 55 rear upper impeller assembly during initial installation 91 for maintenance or replacement
105. FPCs have I O Manager ASICs capable of enhanced quality of service and 2 MB of SSRAM Enhanced FPCs can be identified through the CLI or by a sticker on the faceplate The PICs that install on both types of FPC are also hot removable and hot insertable For more information see Physical Interface Cards PICs on page 13 Packet Forwarding Engine m 17 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 6 FPC1 and FPC2 FPC 1 FPC 2 Ejector lever Ejector lever La Offline buttons TU Offline buttons on FPC s on PICs Ejector lever Ejector lever Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators PCGs The router has two Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators PCGs installed in the slots at the rear of the chassis that are labeled PCG O and PCG 1 as shown in Figure 3 The PCGs generate a 125 MHz clock signal used to gate packet processing During startup the active Routing Engine determines which PCG is master and which is backup and the MCS relays the decision to the PCGs and to the modules and ASICs in the Packet Forwarding Engine that use the clock signal The modules and ASICs then use only the signal from the master source PCGs are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removal or failure of the backup PCG does not affect router function When the
106. Hardware 255 Locating Component Serial Numbers 0oooocccccccccc cnn cnn cnc cri 255 CIP Serial NumberlD Label eiii ld de teeter A 257 Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label 257 DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label 258 FPG Serial Number ID Lala od aia 259 MCS SerialNumber He 2i e or adi a pardas 259 PCG Serial Number ID Lapel tia AAA 260 PIC Serial Number TD Label a is orate science eter re Yasar Aa me 260 Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label 261 SFM Serial Number ID Label ni ice creek trees didas 262 Coritacting Customer SUDDOFE codec ctetu bas ply PLI Se Aa 262 Information You Might Need to Supply oa 265 Return Procedure rana iod serre ata ae da 263 Jools and Parts Requited tit e S RS ebd i ee ho 264 Packing the Routing Node for Shipment cnn circos 265 Packing Components for Shipment seksan sakatessa ae a er a 267 Cable Connector Pinouts 269 RJ 45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port 269 DB 9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE POLES det doutes ee E dc eebe ee dE 270 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts for El ands 270 X 21 and V 35 Cable Pinouts for EIA 530 PIC isse 275 Fast Ethernet 48 port Cable Pinouts erer s nosen erete e e e 274 Index Itidex 2t dee oe EAD NE CIRC dde quee d dade etse eere ds 279 Table of Contents WM Xi M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Xii mM Table of Contents List of Figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fi
107. IVIEW eg Eeer lito 51 Packet Forwarding Engine isicsrcrrcrri 51 ROUTING SENSING A AO 53 ASIC as key element of router design 5 Distributed Buffer Manager component on SEM cece 19 role in forwarding ssssssss 52 I O Manager component or PP Crisis sd bees 16 role in forwarding sssssssssss 52 Internet Processor II component on SEM EENS NNN edie 19 role Ip forwarding iria cia e 52 OM PP Ca EE EE EE 16 ont HIE Aen gd ia le ane RR foe a dat 15 0 US EE 19 Packet Director component on FPG I arepe oo e aE e 16 role in forwarding siste est tote t 52 ATM analyzer use of e v eee deee 134 attenuation in fiber optic Cable ooo 71 auxiliary port for Routing Engine management cable connection during initial installation 114 connector pinouts DB 9 270 replacement instructions 146 specifications otra aad re rs dar 74 tools required it eee ae 139 GESCHIPHON EE EE 33 B BITS input portss0n CIP sete eee 34 braces in configuration statements sssssse xxi brackets angle in syntax descriptions sii XX square in configuration statements xxi c cable auxiliary or console port for Routing Engine management connecting during initial installation 114 TEPlACIN Beats term to tates y eas 146 tools re quitedi eegend Pha re e xu pde ta 159 Ethernet port for Routing Engine management connecti
108. If two host modules are installed use one of the following two methods to determine which is functioning as master m Note which of the green host module MASTER LEDs is lit on the craft interface m Issue the following CLI command The master Routing Engine is designated Master in the Current state field user host gt show chassis routing engine Routing Engine status Slot 0 Current state Master 5 If the component you are removing belongs to the master host module and a second host module is installed issue the following CLI command to switch mastership to the standby host module user host gt request chassis routing engine master switch If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6 0 or later and are configured for graceful switchover the standby Routing Engine immediately assumes Routing Engine functions and there is no interruption to packet forwarding Otherwise packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing Engine becomes the master and the Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect to the new master Routing Engine For information about configuring graceful switchover see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Ce NOTE Router performance might change if the standby Routing Engine s configuration differs from the former master s configuration For the most predictable performance configure the two Routing Engines identically except for paramete
109. LI show chassis routing engine command to check the status of the Routing Engines As shown in the sample output the master Routing Engine is designated Master in the Current state field user host gt show chassis routing engine Routing Engine status Slot 0 Current state Election priority Temperature DRAM Memory utilization CPU utilization User Background Kernel Interrupt Idle Model Serial ID Start time Uptime Load averages Routing Engine status Slot 1 Current state Election priority Temperature DRAM Memory utilization CPU utilization User 37 768 18 o OO b OO 36 768 16 Master Master default degrees C 98 degrees F MB percent percent percent percent percent percent RE 2 0 8b00000792898b01 2003 04 29 16 09 49 PDT 16 days 3 hours 6 minutes 1 minute 0 00 34 seconds 15 minute 0 00 5 minute 0 00 Backup Backup default degrees C 96 degrees F MB percent percent 131 Maintaining Host Module Components W M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Background Kernel Interrupt Idle Model Serial ID Start time Uptime 0 percent 0 percent 0 percent 100 percent RE 2 0 6d000007c8150801 2003 04 22 10 01 29 PDT 16 days 3 hours 6 minutes 34 seconds m Issue the CLI show chassis environment mcs command to check the status of the MCSs As shown in the sample output the MCS that belongs to the master host module is designated Master in the State field
110. M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net Part Number 530 007250 01 Revision 5 This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine developed by Epilogue Technology an Integrated Systems Company Copyright 1986 1997 Epilogue Technology Corporation All rights reserved This program and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes copyright 1988 1989 1993 University of Toronto This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California Copyright 9 1979 1980 1983 1986 1988 1989 1991 1992 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved GateD software copyright 1995 the Regents of the University All rights reserved Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators Gated is based on Kirton s EGP UC Berkeley s routing daemon routed and DCN s HELLO routing protocol Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation Portions of the GateD software copyright 1988 Regent
111. Mpps Up to four SFMs can be installed in the router processing a total of 160 Mpps The SFMs are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removing or inserting an SFM causes a brief interruption in forwarding performance about 500 ms as the Packet Forwarding Engine reconfigures the distribution of packets across the remaining SFMs For SFM replacement instructions see Replacing an SFM on page 188 Packet Forwarding Engine m 19 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 20 The SFM communicates with the Routing Engine using a dedicated 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link that transfers routing table data from the Routing Engine to the forwarding table in the Internet Processor II ASIC The link is also used to transfer from the SFM to the Routing Engine routing link state updates and other packets destined for the router that have been received through the router interfaces The ASICs and other components on the SFM provide the following functions Route lookups The Internet Processor II ASIC on each SFM performs route lookups using the forwarding table stored in SSRAM Management of shared memory on the FPCs One Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC receives the 64 byte data cells into which the I O Manager ASICs on each FPC divide incoming packets and uniformly allocates them throughout the shared memory buffers located on the FPCs Transfer of outgoing data packets The second Distributed Buffer Manager
112. NNEN Cep era da 54 ure 25 Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table Updates 55 ure 26 Typical Center Mount Rach 61 ure 27 Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements 00 2 0 cece eee eee 62 ure 28 Power and Grounding Cable Lug cnn 67 ure 29 Typical Source Cabling to the Router 0 0 68 ure 50 Power and Grounding Cable Connections sss 70 ure 31 Unpacking one il 79 ure 32 Removing a Power SUPplY ANNER NENNEN ENNEN NEEN ENNEN cas da 86 re 33 ERR VAN 88 ute 34 REMOVE MESSI a a is a 89 ure 55 REMOVING d PEGA ie Non iad srta ei tee ad a dana 90 re 36 Remioving a Routing ENGING det al e ee ene PAR 91 ure 37 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 00 0 0 cece cece eee ees 92 ure 58 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 0 0 00 cece cece eee eee 92 ure 39 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 000 0c cence eee 93 re 40 Removing the Fan Tayu iese trepreno ia tire RENE TEE NENNEN ES eee ere AN 94 ure 41 Removing an PP Co esae e ed esser eser nd Ra RAD praese RACER ER 96 ure 42 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly ooo ccoo cccccn cnn 97 ured5 Attaching the Lifting Handle snosi ei verie teuren ea lados 98 ure 44 Installing the Chassis in a Rack 6 ncnrrnrrrrrrs 99 ure 45 Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly 000 e cece eee eee 101 re 46 Reinstalling an PRC s per nia BE EES
113. NOS software configuration NOTE For additional information about Juniper Networks Internet routers and the Physical Interface Cards PICs they support either corrections to or information that might have been omitted from this guide see the hardware release notes at http www juniper net This guide is designed for network administrators who are installing and maintaining a Juniper Networks router or preparing a site for router installation To use this guide you need a broad understanding of networks in general the Internet in particular networking principles and network configuration Any detailed discussion of these concepts is beyond the scope of this guide Documentation Conventions Table 1 defines the notice icons used in this guide Documentation Conventions E xix M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 1 Notice Icons Icon oe AN A Table 2 defines the text and syntax conventions Table 2 Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Bold sans serif typeface Fixed width typeface Italic typeface Italic sans serif typeface Sans serif typeface lt gt angle brackets pipe symbol XX E Documentation Conventions Meaning Informational note Caution Warning Description Represents text that you type Represents output that appears on the terminal screen n ntroduces important new erms u dentifies book names n dentifies RFC and Internet draft itles Re
114. Offline button Prepares the SFM for removal from the router when pressed Two LEDs Indicate SFM status There is a green one labeled OK and an amber one labeled FAIL Table 7 describes the LED states Ejector handles and locking tabs Control the locking system that secures the SFM in the chassis NOTE For specific information about SFM components for example the amount of SSRAM and DRAM issue the show chassis sfm detail command Figure 8 Switching and Forwarding Module Ejector locking tab 1184 Offline button LEDs Packet Forwarding Engine mm 221 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 7 States for SFM LEDs ad Color state eege On steadily SFM is functioning normally FAIL Host Module 22 Host Module SFM is starting up On steadily SEM has failed The host module constructs routing tables performs system management functions and generates the SONET SDH clock signal for SONET SDH interfaces It consists of a paired Routing Engine and Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS For a host module to function both of its components Routing Engine and MCS must be installed and operational One or two host modules can be installed into the midplane from the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 the Routing Engine slot labeled RE O is below the MCS slot labeled MCS O and the RE 1 slot is above the MCS 1 slot If two host modules are installed both are powered on but on
115. Power Connection and Cable Specifications on page 67 38 Mm Power System Hardware Component Overview Figure 19 Circuit Breaker Box Fuses Cooling System O V SS SZ 9699 Si E 1225 The router uses fuses from the Cooper Bussman brand GMT series for the FPCs MCSs PCGs and SFMs The fuses are located in a fuse box on the rear of the midplane When the fuse for a component blows the component stops functioning even though it is installed correctly and the power supplies are providing power to the router For more information see Blown Fuse Indicators on page 211 For fuse replacement instructions see Replacing a Fuse on page 204 The cooling system includes a fan tray and several impellers that draw room air into the chassis to keep its internal temperature below a maximum acceptable level When the temperature is below the maximum the fans and impellers function at less than full speed If the MCS detects that the temperature of a component has exceeded the acceptable maximum for example because an impeller is removed it automatically increases the speed of the remaining impellers and fans to reduce the temperature The fans and impellers can function at the higher speed indefinitely For more information about the cooling system see the following sections W Cooling System Components on page 40 W Airflo
116. S Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management As the FPC comes online the green FPC LED labeled OK begins to blink It continues to blink while the Routing Engine downloads software to the FPC the FPC runs its diagnostics and the PICs housed in the FPC are enabled Packet forwarding then halts for about 200 ms while the Packet Forwarding Engine incorporates the memory on the new FPC into the memory buffers shared by all FPCs When the FPC is online the OK LED lights steadily AN CAUTION After the OK LED lights steadily wait at least 30 seconds before removing the FPC again removing a FPC from a different slot or inserting an FPC in a different slot Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components You can also verify correct FPC and PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic status commands described in Maintaining FPCs on page 133 and Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 134 Figure 88 Installing an FPC Ejector levers N 1193 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components MN 175 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 89 Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to a PIC Replacing a PCG During nor
117. Tighten the screws to secure the wire 3 Orient the terminal block according to the labels to the left of the appropriate relay contact NC means normally closed C means common and NO means normally open 4 Plug the terminal block into the relay contact and use a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block 5 Attach the other end of the wires to the external device If attaching a reporting device for the other kind of alarm repeat the procedure Connecting PIC Cables Now connect PICs to the network by plugging in network cable To connect cable to the PICs follow this procedure see Figure 59 which shows a fiber optic PIC 1 Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC For cable specifications see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide 2 Ifthe PIC cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug remove the plug Connecting PIC Cables m 115 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 116 WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 3 Insert th
118. Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem dient u niet aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen Varoitus Ala ty skentele j rjestelm n parissa l k yhdist tai irrota kaapeleita ukkosilmalla Attention Ne pas travailler sur le syst me ni brancher ou d brancher les c bles pendant un orage Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schlie en Sie keine Kabel an bzw trennen Sie keine ab wenn es gewittert Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un temporale con fulmini Advarsel Utfor aldri arbeid p systemet eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet nar det tordner eller lyner Aviso N o trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante per odos de mau tempo trovoada jAtenci n No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso de descargas el ctricas en la atm sfera Varning Vid ska skall du aldrig utf ra arbete p systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss kablar Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Operating Temperature Warning WARNING To prevent the router from overheating do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 1049F 400 To prevent airflow restriction allow at least 6 inches 15 2 cm of clearance around the ventilation openings Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Network
119. UTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 6 Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent the cable from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape A CAUTION Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components AN CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 7 Verify that the status LEDs on the PIC faceplate indicate that the SFP is functioning correctly there is an LED for each SFP port For more information about the PIC LEDs see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide You can also verify PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic status command described in Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 134 Replacing Power System Components For instructions on replacing power system components see the following sec
120. When you return components make sure they are adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton W Usethe original shipping materials if they are available m Place individual boards in electrostatic bags m Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking A CAUTION Do not stack any of the router components Packing Components for Shipment Mm 267 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 268 HW Packing Components for Shipment Appendix C Cable Connector Pinouts This chapter describes the pinouts for the following cable connectors m RJ 45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port on page 269 m DB 9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE Ports on page 270 W RJ 48 Cable Pinouts for El and T1 PICs on page 270 W X 21 and V 35 Cable Pinouts for EIA 530 PIC on page 273 W Fast Ethernet 48 port Cable Pinouts on page 274 RJ 45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port The port on the CIP labeled ETHERNET is an autosensing 10 100 Mbps Ethernet RJ 45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the Routing Engine to a management LAN or other device that supports out of band management For more information see Routing Engine Management Ports on page 33 Table 28 describes the RJ 45 connector pinout Table 28 RJ 45 Connector Pinout Termination network Te
121. YEL 10Mb GRN 100Mb o DT Console port O CONSOLE o Ge Auxiliary port O AUXILIARY 1236 BITS Input Ports In the center of the CIP are two ports labeled BITS A and BITS B see Figure 16 The router does not support BITS input so these ports do not function Alarm Relay Contacts At the bottom of the CIP are two relay contacts for connecting the router to external alarm reporting devices the upper labeled RED ALARM and the lower 34 NW Connector Interface Panel CIP Hardware Component Overview YELLOW ALARM see Figure 16 A system condition that causes the red or yellow alarm LED to light on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact For instructions for attaching a device to the alarm relay contacts see Connecting to an External Alarm Reporting Device on page 115 Figure 16 Alarm Relay Contacts and BITS Input Ports Power System es o BITSB BITS 2 input ports o RED ALARM ncf o c INO o Alarm relay o contacts NO o YELLOW ALARM Lo 1173 The router uses DC power There are two load sharing pass through power supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 The power supplies connect to the midplane which distributes power to router components according to their individual voltage requirements When the power supplies are installed and operational they aut
122. ace Alarm Relay Wires on page 147 and Replace PIC Cables on page 185 Remove all Field Replaceable Units FRUs from the router Remove the router from the rack W Ifyou are using a mechanical lift place the lift platform under the router unscrew and remove the mounting screws from the rack and move the router to the shipping crate W If you are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is fully supported by a shelf or another router unscrew and remove the mounting screws from the rack Four people can then lift the router and move it to the shipping crate W Ifyou are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is not fully supported by a shelf four people should grasp the router while a fifth person unscrews and removes the mounting screws from the rack The four lifters can then move the router to the shipping crate Place the router in the shipping crate or onto the pallet If on a pallet bolt the router to the pallet Cover the router with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on top of and around the router Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam Securely tape the box closed or place the crate cover over the router Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking Packing the Routing Node for Shipment Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware Packing Components for Shipment To pack and ship individual components follow these guidelines W
123. ach rack rail making sure the chassis is level 6 Install one of the mounting screws provided into each of the two aligned holes Use a 5 32 in Allen wrench to tighten the screws 7 Moving up each post or ear install a screw in every mounting hole 8 Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level 9 Loosen the thumbscrews on the lifting handle and remove it from the chassis 98 m Installing the Chassis into the Rack Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift 10 Proceed to the instructions in Reinstalling Components into the Chassis on page 99 Figure 44 Installing the Chassis in a Rack Center mounting rack 1 doe LA La e E E d ue a i s P di Pd 2 8 Ib xj 2T E lr A a M e M Le A s di Er LIT ole SSeS 4s get QA SS A AS o z A on o e Chassis rack mounting ear Reinstalling Components into the Chassis ogoooooooooooooooo000000000000 ooooooooooooo oo o M 1172 After you have mounted the chassis in the rack as described in Installing the Chassis into the Rack on page 97 reinstall the router components into the chassis A WARNING The procedures in this section apply only to initial installation and assume that you have not yet connected power to the router If power is connected completely disconnect it befor
124. acket Forwarding Engine Components m 189 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 97 Installing an SFM Locking tab Ejector handle Replace an SFP Small form factor pluggables SFPs are optical transceivers that can be removed from a PIC for more information see Physical Interface Cards PICs on page 13 Figure 98 Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP SFPs are hot insertable and hot removable Removing an SFP does not interrupt PIC functioning but the removed SFP no longer receives or transmits data To replace an SFP perform the following procedures m Removing an SFP on page 190 W Installing an SFP on page 191 Removing an SFP To remove an SFP follow this procedure see Figure 98 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the SFP Have ready a rubber safety cap for the SFP transceiver and the cable 190 1H Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Label the cable connected to the SFP so that you can later reconnect it to the correct SFP 4 Disconnect the cable from the SFP Immediately
125. actor clips and slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis A CAUTION Slide the Routing Engine straight out of the chassis Damage can result if it gets lodged because of uneven movement 9 Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Figure 85 Removing a Routing Engine 1950 Replacing Host Module Components m 167 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 168 Installing a Routing Engine a NOTE If two Routing Engines are installed they must both be the same version To install a Routing Engine follow this procedure see Figure 86 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Verify that the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine is flipped toward the outer edge of the unit If necessary use your thumbs to push and hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge then push the ends of the extractor clips outward 3 Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it and grasp one of the extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand 4 Align the rear of the Routing Engine with the guid
126. all it Figure 51 Reinstalling a Routing Engine Extractor clip 1951 Reinstalling the PCGs The router has two PCGs installed in the slots labeled PCG O and PCG 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 5 To reinstall the PCGs follow this procedure see Figure 52 106 HN Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Place one hand under the PCG to support it and grasp the thumbscrew on the faceplate with the other hand Align the rear of the PCG with the guides inside the chassis and slide it in completely Tighten the thumbscrew on the faceplate to seat the PCG firmly in the chassis Repeat the procedure to reinstall the second PCG Figure 52 Reinstalling a PCG Reinstalling the MCSs 1930 The router can have an MCS in each of the slots labeled MCS O and MCS 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 To reinstall an MCS follow this procedure see Figure 53 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make
127. all one of the mounting screws provided into each of the two aligned holes Use a 5 32 in Allen wrench to tighten the screws Moving up each post or ear install a screw in every mounting hole Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level Move the lift away from the rack To continue the installation proceed to Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration on page 111 Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift You can install the router into a rack either with or without the help of a mechanical lift Because the router weighs between 190 Ib 86 kg and about 370 5 Ib 168 kg depending on configuration using a mechanical lift is recommended for instructions see Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81 If you do not use a mechanical lift you must remove components from the chassis to reduce its weight before lifting it into the rack The reduced chassis weight is approximately 115 lb 52 kg so installing it safely still requires three people to lift and another person to insert the mounting screws Table 22 lists the weight of the chassis and major components Table 22 Router Component Weights Approximate Approximate Component Weight Ib Weight kg 5 Cable management system Chassis with midplane CIP and circuit breake
128. alling the Air rl Da dan A Res Removing the CIP egus roe er eE E nl gered Installingithie CP lts Routing Engine Interface Ports and Alarm Relay Contact Ethernet Cable Connectors cisci herd tw darias caba aa Serial Port ELE votes deut PRESSE in Te EPA SET VER EE Removing the Farn TY Installing the Fan Itay tr c di statu see EELER Removing the Front Impeller Assembly ooo cocos Removing the Screws along the Top Front Edge of the Front Impeller Assemb ly sc us aoc bt e Ee a ure 75 ure 74 ure 75 ure 76 ure 77 ure 78 ure 79 ure 80 ure 81 ure 82 ure 85 ure 84 ure 85 ure 86 ure 87 ure 88 ure 89 ure 90 ure 91 ure 92 ure 95 ure 94 ure 95 ure 96 ure 97 ure 98 ure 99 ure 100 Installing the Circuit Breaker Box ure 101 Removing a Power Supply 6 ccc cece In ure 102 Rear of Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors sss Removing the Craft Interface Installing the Front Impeller Assembly 00 0 cece cece Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 00 0c cee e eee Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 0 000 ceeeeee eee eens Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 00 0c cee eens Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 0 0 cece eee Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 0 cece eee eee Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly
129. amento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Advarsel Nar enheten installeres m jordledningen alltid tilkobles f rst og frakobles sist Aviso Ao instalar a unidade a liga o terra dever ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada Atenci n Al instalar el equipo conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la ltima Varning Vid installation av enheten m ste jordledningen alltid anslutas f rst och kopplas bort sist DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning WARNING Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs When connecting power the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground RTN to RTN then 48 V to 48 V When disconnecting power the proper wiring sequence is 48 V to 48 V RTN to RTN then ground to ground Note that the ground wire should always be connected first and disconnected last Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde RTN naar 4 RTN en 48 V naar 48 V De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en 48 V naar 48 V RTN naar RTN aarde naar aarde Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon RTN varten RTN 48 V varten 48 V Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on 48 V varten 48 V RTN varten RTN maajohto maajohtoon Attention C blez l approvisionnement d alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets appropri s
130. an SFM on page 188 W Installing an SFM on page 189 Removing an SFM To remove an SFM follow this procedure see Figure 96 1 Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 4 Press and hold the offline button on the SFM faceplate until the amber LED labeled FAIL lights in about 5 seconds 5 Loosen the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab shown in Figure 8 using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 6 Pull the end of each ejector handle outward until it is nearly perpendicular to the SFM faceplate 7 Grasp the ejector handles and pull firmly to slide the SFM about halfway out of the chassis 8 Place one hand under the SFM to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag CAUTION When an SFM is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector handles They cannot support its weight Do not stack SFMs on top of or under other com
131. and RE 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 y NOTE If two Routing Engines are installed they must both be the same version To reinstall a Routing Engine follow this procedure see Figure 51 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 105 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 2 Verify that the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine is flipped toward the outer edge of the unit If necessary use your thumbs to push and hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge then push the ends of the extractor clips outward 3 Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it and grasp one of the extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand 4 Align the rear of the Routing Engine with the guide rails inside the chassis and slide it in completely A CAUTION Align the Routing Engine carefully with the guide rails and push it in evenly Damage can result if it gets lodged in the rails because of uneven movement 5 Press the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine inward to seat the unit firmly in the chassis If there is a second Routing Engine repeat the procedure to reinst
132. ap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Loosen the thumbscrew at the lower right corner of the PCG faceplate using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 4 Grasp the thumbscrew and slide the PCG about halfway out of the chassis AN CAUTION Be careful to slide the PCG straight out of the chassis to avoid bending any of the pins on the underside of the board 5 Place one hand under the PCG to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 6 Repeat the procedure to remove the second PCG Removing Components from the Chassis m 89 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 35 Removing a PCG Removing the Routing Engines The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE O and RE 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 Each Routing Engine weighs approximately 1 5 lb 0 7 kg To remove a Routing Engine follow this procedure see Figure 36 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a p
133. arse a tierra Asegurarse de que el equipo principal est conectado a tierra durante el uso normal Varning Denna utrustning r avsedd att jordas Se till att v rdenheten r jordad vid normal anv ndning In Case of Electrical Accident If an electrical accident results in an injury take the following actions in this order 1 Use caution Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury 2 Disconnect power from the router 3 If possible send another person to get medical aid Otherwise assess the condition of the victim then call for help Midplane Energy Hazard Warning WARNING High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the router midplane Be careful not to contact the midplane connectors or any component connected to the midplane with any metallic object while servicing components installed in the router Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning WARNING The router has more than one power supply connection All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan n stroomtoevoerverbinding alle verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid volledig te verwijderen Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Varoitus T ss laitteessa on useampia virtal hdekytkent j Kaikki kytkenn t on irrotettava kokonaan jotta
134. ated behind Connector Interface Panel CIP the cable management Packet Forwarding Engine system Clock Generator PCG Flexible PIC Concentrator Routing Engine FPC Switching and Forwarding Physical Interface Card Module SFM PIC Power supply Small form factor pluggable SFP For FRU replacement instructions see Replacing Hardware Components on page 139 System Redundancy 4 The router is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the entire system to fail The following hardware components contribute to system redundancy W Cooling system When the temperature inside the router is below the acceptable maximum the cooling system s components function at less than full speed If the temperature becomes excessive for example because a cooling system component is removed the MCS automatically increases the speed of the remaining components to reduce the temperature The cooling System Redundancy System Overview system can function at the higher speed indefinitely For more information see Cooling System on page 39 m Host module Routing Engine and MCS functioning together The router can have one or two host modules If two host modules are installed one the master is active and the other is in standby mode If the master host module or either of its components is removed from the chassis the standby host module becomes active The Routing Engine and MCS must reside in adjacent
135. bed in Table 11 The offline button labeled with the FPC slot number for example FPC2 prepares the FPC for removal from the router when pressed Craft Interface m 31 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 11 States for FPC LEDs Lt Color se oes OK Green On steadily FPC is functioning normally FPC is starting up or going offline Off FPC is offline or not installed CH On steadily FPC has failed Connector Interface Panel CIP The Connector Interface Panel CIP is located at the left side of the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 It houses Routing Engine management ports and alarm relay contacts as shown in Figure 14 and described in the following sections W Routing Engine Management Ports on page 55 W BITS Input Ports on page 34 W Alarm Relay Contacts on page 34 32 HN Connector Interface Panel CIP Hardware Component Overview Figure 14 Connector Interface Panel o HOS o o HOST Routing mE Engine ports e 2 E cae 2 o mec E re o WEE BITS A input ports E o O Nc Po J Alarm rel Be arm relay contacts NIS mil e 1204 Routing Engine Management Ports On the upper half of the CIP are two sets of ports for connecting the Routing Engines to one or more external devices on which system administrators can issue JUNOS command line interface CLI com
136. beled OK and a red one labeled FAIL For more information see SFM Components on page 20 Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages Table 26 Chassis Alarm Component Fans and impellers When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition it lights the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface as appropriate trips the corresponding alarm relay contact on the CIP and reports the cause of the alarm in the craft interface LCD To view a more detailed description of the alarm cause issue the show chassis alarms CLI command user host gt show chassis alarms There are two classes of alarm messages W Chassis alarms Indicate a problem with a chassis component such as the cooling system or power supplies as described in Table 26 W Interface alarms Indicate a problem with a specific network interface as described in Table 27 In both Table 26 and Table 27 the text in the column labeled LCD Message appears in the LCD The text in the column labeled CLI Message appears in the output from the show chassis alarms command Messages LCD Message CLI Message RED ALARM fan name Failure Fan Removed YELLOW ALARM fan name Removed Fans Missing RED ALARM Too many fans missing or failing Overview of Troubleshooting Resources m 209 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide LCD Message CLI Message Temperature Temperature Warm YELLOW ALARM Temperature Warm sensors Temperature Hot RED ALARM Temperature Hot RED
137. bly 00 cece cece eee ee eee 150 Removing the Front Impeller Assembhy 00a 151 Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly 152 Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly 153 Installing the Front Impeller Assembly eee 154 Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 0 e eee eee 154 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly ssssssus 155 Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 155 Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ooo 156 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 5 157 Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ooo 158 Replacing Host Module Components 0 cece e cece e cece e eens 159 Replacing an MES rat A A er qu ut 159 REMOVING ani MES coc a e Ob I ACE P idos 159 Installing an MES er I ote etm ee El EE 161 Removing and Insert the PC Card 163 Removing the PC Cards EE SAT 163 Insert the PC Carder rla eere eeh RN Deb e tere bbs 164 Replacing a Routing Engine ssssssssssssssssss e 165 Removing a Routing Engine ENEE RR be t RR EUR Res 165 Installing a ROUTING ENJIN avion ig or meme ete s 168 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 0000 00 169 Replacing an EPQ iuo ia oerte Absa ae gerne Pep adag ee OU t sates 169 REMOVING AN FP Css ett manent ad Aere bbb bi beue t eut ias 170 Installing NEP AAA AS 172 Replacing a Pla vts ad e tudes
138. cable management system on the front of the chassis as shown in Figure 1 It weighs approximately 13 lb 5 9 kg To remove the fan tray follow this procedure see Figure 69 1 Unwrap any PIC cables from the spools on the cable management system and remove the cables from the tray Arrange the cables so that they do not block the front of the cable management system and tray and secure them with temporary fasteners so that they are not supporting their own weight as they hang from the connector CAUTION Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point Replacing Cooling System Components Replacing Hardware Components 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the fan tray using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 4 Grasp the sides of the fan tray and pull firmly to slide it halfway out of the chassis AN CAUTION To avoid injury keep tools and your fingers away from the fans as you slide the fan tray out of the chassis The fans might still be spinning 5 Place one hand under the fan tray to support it and slide the tra
139. cated on the craft interface For more information see FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 51 Four PIC offline buttons on FPC1 only Prepare each corresponding PIC for removal from the FPC Ejector levers Control the locking system that secures the FPC in the card cage Cem NOTE For specific information about FPC components for example the amount of memory available issue the show chassis fpc command Packet Forwarding Engine Hardware Component Overview FPC Types The router supports two types of FPC shown in Figure 6 W FPCI standard or enhanced Supports PICs including single port OC 12 5TM 4 and Gigabit Ethernet W FPC2 standard or enhanced Supports higher speed PICs including OC 48 5TM 16 and Tunnel services You can install any combination of FPC types together on the router FPCs are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 When you remove or install an FPC packet forwarding halts for about 200 ms while the Packet Forwarding Engine adjusts to the change in the amount of memory available in the pool located on and shared by all FPCs When you install an FPC into a functioning router the Routing Engine downloads the FPC software the FPC runs its diagnostics and the PICs housed on the FPC are enabled Forwarding continues uninterrupted during this process For FPC replacement instructions see Replacing an FPC on page 169 Enhanced
140. cccoo 75 chromatic dispersion in fiber optic cable 71 CIP alarm relay contacts See alarm relay contacts ASA TEE 34 installation Instructons erer 145 removal instructions 0 00 cece eee 141 Routing Engine management ports See auxiliary port console port Ethernet port SerialNumber e rr rd 257 circuit breaker box description hardware and function 38 installation Ipstructons 0 0 e ee 195 removal instructions 000 0 cece eee 193 tools regure do titi 139 cleaning instructions Et ud e edet t t t vex 129 fiber optic transceivers 2c eee 134 clearance around rock 62 280 m Index CLI as troubleshooting too 207 command o display chassis alarm messages 209 o display FPG status sssesesssssssss 155 o display MCS status 151 o display PCG status 155 o display PIC aas 154 o display power supply status 157 o display Routing Engine status 151 o display serial number 255 o display switch master host module 22 tools provided in for accessing and controlling software 50 for monitoring software 50 clock source SONETISDH eee eee 25 command line interface See CLI commands PB rca ir adas 207 request chassis routing engine master switch 22 show chassis alarms 00sec cece eens 209 show chassis environment MCS 31 show chassis environment pcg 35
141. ch as cables cable splices and connectors While attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media it still occurs in both multimode and single mode transmission An efficient optical data link must have enough light available to overcome attenuation Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines m 71 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Dispersion is the spreading of the signal in time The following two types of dispersion can affect an optical data link m Chromatic dispersion The spreading of the signal in time resulting from the different speeds of light rays W Modal dispersion The spreading of the signal in time resulting from the different propagation modes in the fiber For multimode transmission modal dispersion rather than chromatic dispersion or attenuation usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length For single mode transmission modal dispersion is not a factor However at higher bit rates and over longer distances chromatic dispersion rather than modal dispersion limits maximum link length An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that the receiver requires to operate within its specifications In addition the total dispersion must be less than the limits specified for the type of link in Telcordia Technologies document GR 253 CORE Section 4 3 and International Telecommunications Union ITU document G 957 When chromatic dispersion is at
142. ch stud 7 If you are decommissioning the router loosen and remove the screws that secure the grounding lug to the chassis and remove the grounding lug 8 If not immediately attaching replacement cables replace the protective shield on the circuit breaker box and tighten the screws that secure it to the box 9 Verify that the removed cables are not touching or blocking access to any router components Replacing Power System Components m 201 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 104 Disconnecting Power Cables 202 Grounding points i LT To ground Se aa Nut Flat washer Nut Flat washer Cable lug Terminal studs g001226 Connecting Power to the Router Connect power to the router by attaching a grounding cable to the chassis grounding points and attaching power cables from external power sources to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Power and grounding cables are not supplied with the router For cable specifications see Power Connection and Cable Specifications on page 67 a NOTE The router must be connected to at least two separate external power sources A CAUTION There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box You must ensure that power c
143. consists of two major components m Packet Forwarding Engine Performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching route lookups and packet forwarding W Routing Engine Provides Layer 3 routing services and network management The Packet Forwarding Engine and the Routing Engine perform independently but communicate constantly through a 100 Mbps internal link This arrangement provides streamlined forwarding and routing control and the ability to run Internet scale networks at high speeds Figure 22 illustrates the relationship between the Packet Forwarding Engine and the Routing Engine Figure 22 System Architecture Routing Engine 100 Mbps link Packet Forwarding Packets Engine out 1244 For a discussion of the architectural components see the following sections W Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture on page 51 W Routing Engine Architecture on page 53 Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture The Packet Forwarding Engine performs Layer 2 and Layer 5 packet switching It can forward up to 160 for all packet sizes The aggregate throughput for the router is 160 gigabits per second Gbps simplex or 80 Gbps full duplex The Packet Forwarding Engine is implemented in application specific integrated circuits ASICs It uses a centralized route lookup engine and shared memory Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture m 51 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide The Packet Forwarding Engine architect
144. cover the transceiver and the end of the cable with a rubber safety cap WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 5 Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 6 Pull the ejector handle away from the SFP faceplate to unseat the SFP from the PIC Pull the SFP out of the PIC and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Installing an SFP To install a replacement SFP follow this procedure see Figure 98 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD poin
145. d parts listed in Table 24 Tools and Parts Required m 139 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 24 Tools and Parts Required Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat CIP Craft interface FPC Front impeller assembly MCS PIC PCG Routing Engine SFM Electrostatic discharge ESD All grounding wrist strap Flat blade screwdriver 2 5 mm Alarm relay contacts on CIP Flat blade screwdriver Craft interface approximately 1 4 in 6 mm Front impeller assembly Phillips screwdrivers numbers Air fil 1 and 2 CIP Circuit breaker box Craft interface DC power cables to remove protective shield over circuit breaker box Fan tray Fuse to remove rear lower impeller assembly mpeller assembly PCG PIC Power supply Routing Engine SFM 7 16 in hexagonal head external Circuit breaker box to remove or install power cables drive socket wrench or nut driver with a minimum of 50 Ib in DC power cables 3 5 Nm tightening torque See following note 140 HN Tools and Parts Required Replacing Hardware Components Wire cutters Alarm relay contacts on CIP Rubber safety cap Fiber optic PIC or PIC cable AN CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables The CIP is located to the le
146. d you need to power down the router again first issue the CLI request system halt command For more information see Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 After a power supply is powered on it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators such as LEDs on the power supply show chassis commands and messages on the craft interface LCD to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds Figure 103 Installing a Power Supply go01919 Disconnecting and Connecting Power 200 The power cables from the external power sources connect to terminal studs on the circuit breaker box located at the lower right rear of the chassis To disconnect or connect power to the router perform the following procedures Also follow these procedures when replacing the power cables grounding cable or both W Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 W Connecting Power to the Router on page 202 Disconnecting Power from the Router To disconnect power from the router follow this procedure see Figure 104 1 Onthe console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software If two Routing Engines are installed also issue the command on the backup Routing Engine user host gt request system halt Replacing Power System Components Replacing
147. directly above the slot The green LED labeled OK and the red LED labeled FAIL indicate FPC status For more information see FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 31 W Host module Two sets of LEDs at the upper right corner of the craft interface indicate the status of the two host modules Each set includes three LEDs a green one labeled MASTER another green one labeled ONLINE and a red one labeled OFFLINE For more information see Host Module LEDs on page 31 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources Troubleshooting Hardware Components LEDs on Hardware Components LEDs on the faceplates of the following hardware components report their status W DC power supply A green LED labeled CB ON a blue one labeled OUTPUT OK and an amber one labeled CB OFF The original power supply also has an amber LED labeled NO AIRFLOW For more information see Power Supply on page 36 W MCS A blue LED labeled MASTER a green one labeled OK and an amber one labeled FAIL For more information see MCS Components on page 26 W PCG A blue LED labeled MASTER a green one labeled OK and an amber one labeled FAIL For more information see PCG Components on page 19 W PIC Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on the PIC faceplate Some PICs have additional LEDs often one per port The meaning of the LED states differs for various PICs For more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide W SFM A green LED la
148. e cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate 4 Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose CAUTION Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point Connecting PIC Cables Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration Figure 59 Attaching Cable to a PIC Providing Power to the Router Connect the router to external power sources and power it on by performing the following procedures W Connecting Power to the Router on page 117 W Powering On the Router on page 119 Connecting Power to the Router Connect power to the router by attaching a grounding cable to the chassis grounding points and attaching power cables from external power sources to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Power and grounding cables are not supplied with the router For cable specifications see
149. e chassis above the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 It includes the elements shown in Figure 11 Craft Interface m 27 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 11 Craft Interface Yellow alarm Red alarm Alarm cutoff Navigation LCD Navigation Host module LED LED button buttons buttons LEDs OFFLINE ONLINE MASTER HOSTO HOST1 OFFLINE ONLINE MASTER 1231 T FPC LEDs and offline buttons for FPC 0 7 a NOTE The LEDs for some router components are located on the component faceplate rather than on the craft interface For information about those LEDs see the following sections W PCG Components on page 19 W SFM Components on page 20 W MCS Components on page 26 Power System on page 55 For information about the elements on the craft interface see the following sections W Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button on page 28 W LCD and Navigation Buttons on page 29 W Host Module LEDs on page 51 m FPCLEDs and Offline Button on page 31 Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button Two large alarm LEDs are located at the upper left of the craft interface see Figure 11 The circular red LED lights to indicate a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown The triangular yellow LED lights to indicate a less severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously A condition that causes an LED to light also activates the corresponding alar
150. e continuing See Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 99 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide If you are installing or replacing components in an operational router see Replacing Hardware Components on page 139 Perform the procedures described in the following sections to reinstall components into the chassis first into the front and then into the rear W Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly on page 100 H Reinstalling the FPCs on page 101 W Reinstalling the Fan Tray on page 102 W Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 103 W Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 104 W Reinstalling the Routing Engines on page 105 m Reinstalling the PCGs on page 106 W Reinstalling the MCSs on page 107 W Reinstalling the SFMs on page 108 W Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109 W Reinstalling the Power Supplies on page 109 Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly 100 The front impeller assembly which includes the craft interface is located at the top of the chassis front as shown in Figure 1 To reinstall it follow this procedure see Figure 45 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage
151. e corresponding data cells back into network packet form and passes the packet to the appropriate PIC for transmission to the network For more information see Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine on page 52 Up to eight FPCs install vertically into the midplane from the front of the chassis The FPC slots are numbered from FPCO to FPC7 left to right Each FPC accommodates up to four PICs The PIC slots in each FPC are numbered from O zero through 3 top to bottom An FPC can be installed into any FPC slot regardless of the PICs it contains and any combination of slots can be used If a Packet Forwarding Engine Hardware Component Overview slot is empty you must install a blank FPC panel to shield it so that cooling air can circulate properly throughout the card cage Figure 5 which shows a chassis with an FPC in slot FPCO omits the blank FPC panels to show the position of the FPC in the card cage Figure 5 Front of Chassis with Four PIC FPC Installed in Slot FPCO S 1189 For information about FPC components and types see the following sections m FPC Components on page 16 W FPC Types on page 17 Packet Forwarding Engine m 15 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 16 FPC Components An FPC has the following components FPC card carrier
152. e rails inside the chassis and slide it in completely A CAUTION Align the Routing Engine carefully with the guide rails and push it in evenly Damage can result if it gets lodged in the rails because of uneven movement 5 Press the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine inward to seat the unit firmly in the chassis 6 Check the host module LEDs on the craft interface to verify that the green LED labeled ONLINE is lit for the host module to which the Routing Engine belongs Figure 11 shows the LEDs You can also verify correct Routing Engine functioning by issuing the show chassis routing engine command described in Maintaining Host Module Components on page 131 7 Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner to secure it to the chassis For complete instructions see Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109 AN CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place Replacing Host Module Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 86 Installing a Routing Engine 1951 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing an FPC For instructions on replacing Packet Forwarding Engine components see the following sections Replacing an FPC on page 169 Replacing a PCG on page 176 Replacing a PIC on page 179 Replace PIC Cabl
153. e ree dee e e e dn 202 Connecting Power and Grounding Cables eee e cece 204 Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box 206 Fus Locations in the Fuse BOX odia a ERREUR BU aa A 211 Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag 227 S rial Number ID Labels e htt e pta d e PP ea ts 256 CIP SerialiNumbetr IDEabe ace ua e a lb RR ate d Rae 257 Craft Intertace Serial Number ID Label puta tl bet e eren 258 DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label 258 EPC SertallNumber ID Label sy inaina tia n eiim ERR 259 MES Serial Number IDEADO 2 tea BEE dE ae bates EE EE EE 260 PCG Serial Number ID Tabel ir ext er de e oh 260 PIC Serial NumberlD Label 1 i etit RR ENNEN cone 261 Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label oooooooooccccccccccccccccciic 261 Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label oooooooooocccccccccccccccicii 262 SEM Serial Nur ber ID Label 3 122281 wontons Ep te s 262 ETA 530 Plot E Veget ede dt eRe ds PI PANE YI RT E ERE EG 275 Fast Ethernet 43 port Plinio SE 275 VHDCGLto RE21 Cable idad sates daca E AAA 275 List of Figures MW XV M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide xvi List of Figures List of Tables Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab eli NOTICE ICONS uge pois ad a pi dd eh pidas XX 62 TER ANd Syntax Conventions gula tadas ek ere ale ds XX e 3 Juniper Networks Technical D
154. e router has two load sharing redundant power supplies Each power supply is hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 When one power supply fails or is powered down the other power supply automatically assumes the entire electrical load for the router To replace a power supply perform the following procedures m Removing a Power Supply on page 197 W Installing a Power Supply on page 199 Removing a Power Supply The power supplies are located at the bottom rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 Each power supply weighs approximately 13 Ib 5 9 kg AN CAUTION Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time while the router is operational The power supply must remain in the chassis for proper airflow To remove a power supply follow this procedure see Figure 101 Replacing Power System Components m 197 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Press the power switch for the power supply located on the circuit breaker box to the OFF 0 position ES NOTE If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a time wait at least 60 sec
155. ecommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud m Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC Use appropriate gauge wire to handle up to 90 A W You must connect only to a DC power source for which the output complies with the safety extra low voltage SELV requirements of UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 95 EN 60950 and IEC 60950 to a DC input terminal block m ADC powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for installation in a restricted access location In the United States a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Cem NOTE Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker This breaker should protect against excess currents short circuits and earth faults in accordance with NEC ANSI NFPA70 W Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct Under certain conditions connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment W For personal safety connect the green and yellow wire to safety earth ground at both the router and the supply side of the DC wiring W The marked input voltage of 48 VDC for DC powered routers is the nominal voltage associated with the battery circuit and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the charging function H Because the
156. ector as shown in Figure 115 Figure 115 PCG Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label AA1234 PIC Serial Number ID Label The serial number ID label for a PIC is located on the right side of the PIC as shown in Figure 116 260 HN Locating Component Serial Numbers Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware Figure 116 PIC Serial Number ID Label Serial number 1D label 1615 X o v pp 2 0 u Tay S Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label The location of the serial number ID label depends on the type of Routing Engine see Figure 117 and Figure 118 Some Routing Engines might have more than one serial number Contact your Juniper Networks support representative if you need assistance in determining which serial number to provide Figure 117 Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label Teknor Silicon Serial ID 460000078ba2201 Board S N 900106217 1607 Locating Component Serial Numbers m 261 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 118 Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label 1576 TTT 1234567891012 Serial number ID label SFM Serial Number ID Label The serial number ID label on an SFM is located on the left side of the top panel as shown in Figure 119 Figure 119 SFM Serial Number ID Label Serial number ID label AA12
157. edit root set system name server address Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear text password an encrypted password or an ssh public key string DSA or RSA edit root set system root authentication plain text password New password password Retype new password password or edit root set system root authentication encrypted password encrypted password or edit root set system root authentication ssh dsa public key or edit root set system root authentication ssh rsa public key Optionally display the configuration to verify that it is correct edit root show system hostname host name domain name domain name backup router address root authentication authentication method password public key name server address 122 HN Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration interfaces fxpO unit O family inet address address prefix length Commit the configuration to activate it on the router edit root commit Optionally configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration statements Then commit the changes to activate them on the router edit root host commit When you have finished configuring the router exit configuration mode edit root host exit root host gt Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software m 123 M160 Internet Rou
158. eep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles which can cause drops in the received power level Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary before connecting an interface Label both ends of PIC cables to identify them Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components Maintaining Hardware Components The following guidelines apply specifically to fiber optic cable Maintaining the PCGs When you unplug a fiber optic cable from a PIC always place a rubber safety plug over the transceiver on the PIC faceplate and on the end of the cable Anchor fiber optic cable to avoid stress on the connectors When attaching fiber to a PIC be sure to secure the fiber so it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Never let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber optic cable into and out of optical instruments such as ATM or SONET SDH analyzers can cause damage to the instruments that is expensive to repair Instead attach a short fiber extension to the optical equipment Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension which is easy and inexpensive to replace Keep fiber optic cable connections clean Small micro deposits of oil and dus
159. elschuhen zu verwenden Diese Abschl sse sollten die angemessene Gr be f r die Dr hte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce usare connettori omologati come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l alto I connettori devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l isolante che il conduttore Advarsel Hvis det er n dvendig med flertr dede ledninger brukes godkjente ledningsavslutninger som for eksempel lukket sl yfe eller spadetype med oppoverbeyde kabelsko Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig st rrelse i forhold til ledningene og skal klemme sammen b de isolasjonen og lederen Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalac o el ctrica de cabo torcido use termina es de cabo aprovadas tais como termina es de cabo em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima Estas termina es de cabo dever o ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos e dever o prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor jAtenci n Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado utilizar terminales para cables homologados tales como las de tipo bucle cerrado o espada con las leng etas de conexi n vueltas hacia arriba Estos terminales deber n ser del tamano apropiado para los cables que se utilicen y tendr n que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor Varning N r flertr diga ledningar kr vs
160. emoving the Rear Component Cover on page 86 4 If two host modules are installed use one of the following two methods to determine which is functioning as master W Note which of the green host module MASTER LEDs is lit on the craft interface Replacing Host Module Components m 165 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 166 m Issue the following CLI command The master Routing Engine is designated Master in the Current state field user host gt show chassis routing engine Routing Engine status Slot 0 Current state Master 5 If the component you are removing belongs to the master host module and a second host module is installed issue the following CLI command to switch mastership to the standby host module user host gt request chassis routing engine master switch If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6 0 or later and are configured for graceful switchover the standby Routing Engine immediately assumes Routing Engine functions and there is no interruption to packet forwarding Otherwise packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing Engine becomes the master and the Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect to the new master Routing Engine For information about configuring graceful switchover see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Ce NOTE Router performance might change if the standby Routing Engine s configuration differs from
161. enee 127 redundancy zi o AANEREN 39 See also air filter fan tray front impeller assembly rear lower impeller assembly rear upper impeller assembly craft interface alarm cutoff lamp test button ausisse 28 description hardware and function 27 installation Instructons s s s usseri erer 153 LED yeep raonta e a E A EEREN okt 29 LEDs alarm red and yellow 0 00 28 RRE EE 31 host module o et ett ees 51 removal instructions i e enis 152 routine inspection of 127 serialn EmDerz sce e orte a O 257 tools required siste Lr tees ebe LESER 139 crate See shipping crate curly braces in configuration statements xxi custoImepnsuppOLL zi oe nn pass eon esu i SERI vanes xxiii contacting TAC Sastres xxiii D data flow through Packet Forwarding Engine 52 DB 9 cable connector pinouts auxiliary and console PO rita Toy Ed 270 dispersion in fiber optic cable 0 eee 71 Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC COMPOnentOn Mitra is pista ebe A 19 rolean forwarding EEN ENNEN NN ENN ds 52 documentation set Comments ott ac ENEE xxiii E El PIC pinouts for RJ 48 cable sssseuuuus 270 earthquakes site preparation TO illa 62 tested toleration for seiemic e 62 ETA TACk standards uci ERE t ee seaman ler 60 EIA 550 PIC pinouts for X 21 cable 275 electricity safety warnings isses 227 site wiring guidelines
162. ent 147 tools required 0 0 111 cable auxiliary or console port for Routing Engine management during initial installation 114 for maintenance or replacement 146 tools required 2s erases rd ve ettet tas 111 cable Ethernet port for Routing Engine management during initial installation 114 for maintenance or replacement 146 tools required i e s ere xe rs 111 cable PIC during initial installation 115 for maintenance or replacement 186 chassis using mechanical bt 81 tOOlS TEQUIFEd c et trei fes 81 chassis without mechantcal fr 85 tools Tequired 1 2 s ipe teet amend ts 84 CP e RE e MR Hus 45 circuit breaker Doxa E ra to nta 95 craft interface xi cen eU MER 55 fan tray during initial installation ssu 02 for maintenance or replacement 49 FPC during initial installation 01 for maintenance or replacement 72 front impeller assembly during initial installation ssu 00 for maintenance or replacement 54 MUSES Aira dd d ean d bat ueber TERR 204 MCS during initial installation ssu 107 for maintenance or replacement 161 PG Cards say cte e y Ys 164 PCG during initial installation 106 for maintenance or replacement
163. ents the amount of power available after subtracting attenuation or link loss LL from the power budget Pg A worst case estimate of Py assumes maximum LL PM Pg LL A Py greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to Operate the receiver Factors that can cause link loss include higher order mode losses modal and chromatic dispersion connectors splices and fiber attenuation Table 18 lists an estimated amount of loss for the factors used in the following sample calculations For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment and other factors refer to vendor documentation Table 18 Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss Link Loss Factor Estimated Link Loss Value Higher order mode losses Single mode None Multimode 0 5 dB Modal and chromatic dispersion Single mode None Multimode None if product of bandwidth and distance is less than 500 MHz km Connector Splice Fiber attenuation e mode 0 5 dB km mode 1 dB km The following example uses the estimated values in Table 18 to calculate link loss LL for a 2 km long multimode link with a power budget Pp of 13 dB m Fiber attenuation for 2 km 1 0 dB km 2 dB W Loss for five connectors 0 5 dB per connector 5 0 5 dB 2 5 dB W Loss for two splices 0 5 dB per splice 2 0 5 dB 1 dB W Higher order loss 0 5 dB m Clock recovery module 1 dB The power margin Py is calculated as f
164. eplaceable Units ERUS NENNEN ENEE a ld 4 System Redundaticyu s ores ile teatro tasse ete o se bee ter e bbs Saray 4 Safety Requirements Warnings and Guidelines 0 0 5 Hardware Component Overview 7 ER EE RR NN 7 Packet Forwarding Engine vor PER IER Ee e Ire iine g 11 Mid plane ld ede trus bns 12 Physical Interface Cards Pic 13 PIC Compon entsa sumisa fe oit te to AC UU ele guum td 14 Flexible PIC Concentrators PC 14 FEC COMPONENTS odds ee E EC Les M de E ne hands 16 FPC TYPES ouo a etd don etta cate Peu pl PR ttt aeta 17 Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators Coen 18 PEG COMPONENtS yum ote t REL EIE o 19 Switching and Forwarding Module GEM 19 SEM COImpODents eos Se E e T ga p ERI A dance on 20 Host MOGUJIB ae ET 22 Rotting ENGIN Casciari cas erre e dien eto oe aan ia e e T dns 25 Routing Engine Components e 24 Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS 0 e eee e ees 25 MGS COMPORENES co EE 26 Craft INteriace cce en PER Aa EE ee ere woke 27 Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button 28 LCD and Navigation Buttons 29 LED Idle Mode descuenta cM memet Et AE 29 LED Alarm Mode wer sadsandas rose dh a ape ee or date 50 Table of Contents M v M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Host Module LEDS Ada SAS CERES Punt te iate geet 31 FPC LEDS and Offline BUON errata eines wera as 31 Connector Interface Panel CIPA 32 Routing Engine Management Porte 33 ORK e 34 Alarm Relay CONCISA AA E 34 P
165. er Assembly on page 155 10 Apply voltage from the DC power sources to the power cables so the router receives power 11 Press the switches on the circuit breaker box to the ON position 12 Confirm that the LEDs on the power supply faceplates indicate correct operation the green CB ON LED lights steadily the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks briefly then lights steadily and the amber CB OFF LED does not light NOTE After powering off a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on After powering on a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router again first issue the CLI request system halt command For more information see Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 After a power supply is powered on it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators such as LEDs on the power supply show chassis commands and messages on the craft interface LCD to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds Replacing Power System Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 100 Installing the Circuit Breaker Box Guide pin 1261 Replacing a Power Supply Th
166. er Impeller Assembly 25 103 Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ssssesssessese 104 Reinstalling the Routing Enges 105 Reinstalling the PEGS oi iia tbe ee AAA aeu 106 en Ee tee 107 Table of Contents NW Vii M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Reinstalling thesSEMS s xoa tt endoso ae E bE RA rata de menda 108 Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover 109 Reinstalling the Power Supplies 109 Chapter 9 Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration 111 Tools and Parts R quired NEEN x a ere a DEE TA 111 Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices 112 Connecting to a Network for Out of Band Management 114 Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device 114 Connecting to an External Alarm Reporting Device 115 Connecting PIG ele 115 Providing Power to the RUTEM sene t oo deret ar CRURA ed 117 Connecting Power to the Router e 117 Powering Or tlhe ROWER lee iso atten debe nee Pop o ipe PR nei 119 Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software 0c ees 121 Part 3 Hardware Maintenance Replacement and Troubleshooting Procedures Chapter 10 Maintaining Hardware Components 127 Routine Maintenance Procedures 0 occ e eee ee eee e ees 127 Maintaining Cooling System Components 0 cece 127 Maintaining the Air Filter ce ENEE 128 Removing the Air Filth sas nos dda weaned dodo ERE r
167. er impellers in the rear of the chassis They cool the SFMs host module PCGs and power supplies See Figure 2 The cooling system draws in room air through the air intake vent located at the front of the chassis below the cable management system After entering the chassis the air stream separates into separate flows for the front and rear subsystems and the MCS monitors the temperature of each flow independently For a graphic depiction of the airflow see Figure 20 For the cooling system to function properly the clearance around the chassis must be sufficient for unobstructed airflow See Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62 During normal operation the impellers and fans in the fan tray function at less than full speed The MCS constantly monitors the temperatures detected by sensors on the midplane and router components adjusting the speed of the fans and impellers as necessary If the router temperature exceeds the acceptable maximum the MCS Troubleshooting the Cooling System Troubleshooting Hardware Components turns off the power supplies The following conditions automatically cause the fans and impellers to run at full speed and also trigger the indicated alarm A fan or impeller fails red alarm One of the impellers is removed yellow alarm The router temperature exceeds the temperature warm threshold yellow alarm The temperature of the router exceeds the maximum te
168. er to the management device 2 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable Figure 57 shows the connector into the appropriate ETHERNET port on the CIP Figure 56 shows the external device ports on the CIP The ports labeled HOST O connect to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot RE 0 and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot RE 1 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the network device Figure 57 Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector ij Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device 114 To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine connect it to the appropriate CONSOLE port on the CIP To use a laptop modem or other auxiliary device connect it to the appropriate AUXILIARY port on the CIP Both ports accept an RS 232 EIA 232 serial cable with DB 9 DB 9 connectors One such cable is provided with the router If you want to connect a device to both ports you must supply another cable For cable specifications see Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 To connect a management console or auxiliary device follow this procedure 1 Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device 2 Plug the female end shown in Figure 58 of the provided serial cable into the appropriate CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port Figure 56 shows the external device ports on the CIP The ports labeled HOST 0 connect to the Routing Eng
169. ering form form RX Ring gt TX Ring RX Tip lt gt TX Tip TX Ring gt RX Ring X Tip RX Tip RJ 48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs m 2721 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 32 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 DB 15 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numbering form form 2 fd Table 33 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 DB 15 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numbering form form RX Ring lt gt TX Ring RX Tip TX Tip X Ring gt RX Ring X Tip RX Tip 272 NW RJ48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs Cable Connector Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 DB 15 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numbering form form X 21 and V 35 Cable Pinouts for EIA 530 PIC The EIA 550 PIC accepts X 21 and V 35 cable connectors m A V 35 connection requires an DB 25 to V 55 cable and connects to a V 35 data terminal equipment DTE 34 pin Winchester type male cable one per port Table 34 describes the V 35 cable pinouts m An X 21 connection requires an DB 25 to X 21 cable and connects to a X 21 DTE DB 15 male cable Table 35 describes the X 21 cable pinouts Figure 120 EIA 530 PIC 9003044 p Clear To Send X 21 and V 35 Cable Pinout
170. erminal stud Leave the inner washer and nut on each stud Replacing Power System Components Replacing Hardware Components Remove the rear lower impeller assembly by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner and pulling the impeller assembly straight out of the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screw at each corner of the circuit breaker box Loosen the thumbscrews at the top and bottom edge of the box Pull the circuit breaker box straight out of the chassis Figure 99 Removing the Circuit Breaker Box 1262 Installing the Circuit Breaker Box To install the circuit breaker box follow this procedure see Figure 100 L Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure For each power supply verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box is in the OFF 0 position Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Align the guide pin on the back of the circuit breaker bo
171. ernal power source is securely in place and that there is no moisture accumulating near the router m Verify that the cable or cord from the power source to the router is not damaged If the insulation is cracked or broken replace the cable or cord immediately m Verify that the power cables or cord do not touch or obstruct access to other router components and that they do not drape where people could trip on them W Verify that the air flow in and out of cooling system components is not obstructed Maintaining Power Supplies Chapter 11 Replacing Hardware Components Most of the router s hardware components are field replaceable units FRUs which means that you can remove and replace them yourself When you need to replace a router component contact your customer support or sales representative to order the field replaceable unit FRU that contains the component For instructions see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255 For a list of the FRUs on the M160 router see Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Tools and Parts Required on page 139 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables on page 141 Replacing Cooling System Components on page 148 Replacing Host Module Components on page 159 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 169 Replacing Power System Components on page 193 Tools and Parts Required To replace hardware components you need the tools an
172. ersonale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplaering ber montere eller bytte ut dette utstyret Aviso Este equipamento dever ser instalado ou substitu do apenas por pessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado jAtenci n Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por personal t cnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado Varning Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och kvalificerad personal Restricted Access Area Warning WARNING The router is intended for installation in restricted access areas A restricted access area is an area to which access can be gained only by service personnel through the use of a special tool lock and key or other means of security and which is controlled by the authority responsible for the location Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte toegang Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument een slot en sleutel of een ander veiligheidsmiddel en welke beheerd wordt door de overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie Safety Guidelines and Warnings mm 225 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 226 Varoitus Tama laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan johon p sy on rajo
173. es and Warnings on page 244 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 247 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Mm 223 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide General Safety Guidelines and Warnings 224 The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the router from damage The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before during and after installation Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry such as rings bracelets or chains which could become caught in the chassis Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet environments Operate the router only when it is properly grounded Replace fuses only with fuses of the same ty
174. es how to configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 virtual private networks VPNs virtual private LAN service VPLS and Layer 2 circuits Provides configuration examples JUNOS References Network and Services Interfaces Command Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode Reference commands you use to monitor and troubleshoot network and services interfaces on Juniper Networks routing platforms Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode Command Reference commands you use to monitor and troubleshoot most aspects of Juniper Networks routing platforms System Log Messages Reference Describes how to access and interpret system log messages generated by JUNOS software modules and provides a reference page for each message JUNOScript API Documentation JUNOScript API Guide Describes how to use the JUNOScript application programming interface API to monitor and configure Juniper Networks routers JUNOScript API Configuration Reference Provides reference pages for the configuration tags in the JUNOScript API JUNOScript API Operational Reference Provides reference pages for the operational tags in the JUNOScript API JUNOS Comprehensive Index and Glossary Comprehensive Index and Glossary Provides a complete index of all JUNOS Internet software books and the JUNOScript API Guide Also provides a comprehensive glossary Hardware Documentation Hardware Guide Describ
175. es how to install maintain and troubleshoot routers and router components Each platform has its own hardware guide PIC Guide Describes the router Physical Interface Cards PICs Each router platform has its own PIC guide JUNOScope Documentation JUNOScope Software User Guide Describes the JUNOScope software graphical user interface GUI how to install and administer the software and how to use the software to manage router configuration files and monitor router operations XXli BR List of Technical Publications J series Services Router Documentation J series Services Router User Guide Release Notes JUNOS Internet Software Release Notes Hardware Release Notes JUNOScope Software Release Notes J series Services Router Release Notes Documentation Feedback About This Guide Description Contains instructions for installing configuring and managing a J series Services Router The guide explains how to prepare your site for installation unpack and install the hardware power on the router configure secure routing monitor network operations and perform routine maintenance Provide a summary of new features for a particular software release Software release notes also contain corrections and updates to published JUNOS and JUNOScript manuals provide information that might have been omitted from the manuals and describe upgrade and downgrade procedures Describe the available documentation for the r
176. es on page 185 Replacing an SFM on page 188 Replace an SFP on page 190 FPCs are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 When you remove an FPC forwarding operations halt for about 200 ms while the Packet Forwarding Engine flushes the shared memory buffers on the remaining FPCs To replace an FPC perform the following procedures Removing an FPC on page 170 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components M 169 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 170 m Installing an FPC on page 172 Removing an FPC To remove an FPC follow this procedure see Figure 87 1 Place an antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the FPC If you are removing PICs from the FPC prepare an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag for each one If any of the PICs on the FPC use fiber optic cable have ready a rubber safety cap for each transceiver and cable 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Label the cables connected to each PIC on the FPC so that you can later reconnect the cables to the correct PICs 4 Use one of the following methods to take the FPC offline W Press and hold the FPC offline button The green OK LED next to the
177. et Router Hardware Guide Figure 93 Installing a PIC Figure 94 Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to a PIC 184 1H Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replace PIC Cables Replacing Hardware Components Removing and installing PIC cables does not affect router function except that a PIC does not receive or transmit data while its cable is disconnected To replace a PIC cable perform the following procedures W Removing a PIC Cable on page 185 m Installing a PIC Cable on page 186 Removing a PIC Cable To remove a PIC cable follow this procedure 1 If the PIC connects to fiber optic cable have ready a rubber safety cap for each cable and transceiver 2 If removing all cables connected to the PIC use one of the following methods to take the PIC offline W Press and hold the PIC offline button until its failure indicator LED lights which usually takes about 5 seconds The failure LED is usually red for more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide For the PICs that install on an FPC1 the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier For the PICs that install on an FPC2 the offline button is on the PIC faceplate See Figure 6 W Issue the following CLI command user host gt request chassis pic fpc slot f
178. ft side of the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 It houses the Routing Engine interface ports which accept connections to external management and alarm reporting devices The CIP is field replaceable but you must power off the router before removing or installing it It weighs about 6 5 lb 3 kg The cables and wire that connect to the Routing Engine interface ports are hot removable and hot insertable To replace the CIP and cables connecting to the Routing Engine interface ports perform the following procedures m Removing the CIP on page 141 W Installing the CIP on page 143 W Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 145 Removing the CIP To remove the CIP follow this procedure see Figure 64 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software If two Routing Engines are installed also issue the command on the backup Routing Engine user host gt request system halt Cem NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables m 141 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 142 For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference
179. fuse NOTE The LEDs are each about 0 1 2 mm square They might be difficult to see when not lit Another indication that a fuse has blown is that the colored indicator bulb inside it becomes visible through the clear cover on the fuse For information about the indicator bulb color for each fuse type see Table 25 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources NM 211 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide A blown fuse can cause a component to fail even though it is correctly installed and the power supplies are functioning Check for a blown fuse in the following circumstances m The LED that indicates normal operation for the component fails to light W The appropriate CLI show chassis environment command indicates that the component is installed but is not receiving power For instructions for replacing a blown fuse see Replacing a Fuse on page 204 Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center If you need assistance during troubleshooting you can contact the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC by e mail or telephone See Requesting Support on page xxiii Troubleshooting the Cooling System 212 The router s cooling system comprises separate front and rear subsystems W The front subsystem includes the fan tray located behind the cable management system and the impeller located behind the craft interface They cool the FPCs PICs and midplane See Figure 1 W The rear subsystem include upper and low
180. g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Urea Heel 8 ure 2 Rear of Chassis with Component Cover in Place 9 ure 5 Rear of Chassis with Component Cover Removed isses 10 re Midplane sv tae e Ie e eet ERECTA ESCRITA 15 ure 5 Front of Chassis with Four PIC FPC Installed in Slot PPOO 15 Dr e EPGC2 nas oett be eon tae tutus Pa de ea etat ott ten S 18 ure 7 Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator 19 ure 8 Switching and Forwarding Module 21 DESCH ROUNE ENGINE eege al Ae DE sina ae AD an lot e cg 25 ure 10 Miscellaneous Control Subsystem conc n nc rr 27 Ire a TEE 28 lire 12 ECD in Ide Modes e icut da liado Es 30 ure Ta FLED at EEN dun ModE ear pasas 30 re 14 Connector Interface PAN Elina ias ia a SERIE EA 33 ure 15 Routing Engine Interface Ports for Host Modulen 34 ure 16 Alarm Relay Contacts and BITS Input Ponts 55 ure L7 Original Power S pPpl vasca iaa din qe Rs 57 re T8 Enhanced Power Supply etatine Era utt rele gend dub diete el 37 ure 19 Circuit Breaker Boronat tara alaba AE 39 ure 20 Airflow through the Chassis 41 ure 21 Cable Maridgemert Systeri ay hae aenneren 41 re 22 SYStEM ALCHILECCULE ioe s Selten 51 ure 23 Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data How 53 ure 24 Routing Engine Architecture vk NNN cept Pee sens en ener E
181. g information W First line Routing node name W Second line Number of active alarms W Third and fourth lines Individual alarm messages with the most severe condition shown first The prefix on each line indicates whether the alarm is a red R or yellow Y alarm For a list of alarm messages that can appear on the LCD see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 At the upper right corner of the craft interface see Figure 11 are two sets of LEDs that indicate host module status the set labeled HOSTO reports the status of the Routing Engine in slot RE O and MCS in slot MCS O and the set labeled HOST1 reports the status of the Routing Engine in slot RE 1 and the MCS in slot MCS 1 Each set includes three LEDs a green one labeled MASTER another green one labeled ONLINE and a red one labeled OFFLINE Table 10 describes the LED states Table 10 States for Host Module LEDs MASTER ONLINE OFFLINE On steadily Host module is functioning as master Green On steadily Host module components Routing Engine and MCS are installed and functioning normally Blinking Host module is starting up Red On steadily One or both host module components are not installed or have failed FPC LEDs and Offline Button The LEDS and offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface as shown in Figure 11 The red LED labeled FAIL and the green LED labeled OK indicate FPC status as descri
182. g or servicing the router in a rack take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following directives help maintain your safety m The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure W The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack W When mounting the router in a partially filled rack load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack W Ifthe rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the router in the rack Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft moet u speciale Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geinstalleerd die aan een bouwsel is verankerd Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het rek is Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert dient u het rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen dient u de stabilisatoren te montere
183. gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Version Item Chassis idplane FPM CMB FPM Display CIP PEM 0 PCG 0 PCG 1 Routing Engine 0 Routing Engine 1 CS 0 CS SFM SFM SFM SPP SPR SPP EV EV 05 03 03 04 03 07 07 11 11 07 04 07 zl Sal zl sl cJ zl zl Sep d el lt ed 0 001 0 001 0 001 40 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 Part number 245 642 647 0 002649 243 568 568 226 226 228 0 002189 228 Serial number 20082 AW3196 AE6482 AW2008 HE0493 LK16669 HEO486 HF1163 8b00000792898b01 6d000007c8150801 AV4497 HD2643 AG6106 AG6176 HC5574 Description M160 Power Entry Module RE 2 0 RE 2 0 Internet Processor 11 Locating Component Serial Numbers m 255 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide SF SF SF SF SF nj FU Q FP FP FP M M Q U U m JU CO Om OO U U m JU aa JU 1 SPR REV 04 710 002189 HC5964 Internet Processor II 2 SPP REV 07 710 001228 HEO0083 2 SPR REV 04 710 002189 HD6410 Internet Processor II 3 SPP REV 07 710 001228 HC5376 3 SPR REV 04 710 002189 AV8604 Internet Processor II 0 REV 10 710 001255 HB2143 FPC Type 1 PU REV 05 710 001217 HE1067 Cc 0 REV 02 750 003064 HF1353 4x Tl RJ48 oe REV 04 750 001894 HA9492 1x G E 1000 BASE SX c 2 REV 04 750 001895 HE0917 1x OC 12 SONET MM 3 REV 04 750 001895 HE0562 1x OC 12 SONET MM
184. he Software T Ownership Juniper and Juniper s licensors respectively retain ownership of all right title and interest including copyright in and to the Software associated documentation and all copies of the Software Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right title or interest in the Software or associated documentation or a sale of the Software associated documentation or copies of the Software 8 Warranty Limitation of Liability Disclaimer of Warranty If the Software is distributed on physical media such as CD Juniper warrants for 90 days from delivery that the media on which the Software is delivered will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use This limited warranty extends only to the Customer Except as may be expressly provided in separate documentation from Juniper no other warranties apply to the Software and the Software is otherwise provided AS IS Customer assumes all risks arising from use of the Software Customer s sole remedy and uniper s entire liability under this limited warranty is that Juniper at its option will repair or replace the media containing the Software or provide a refund provided that Customer makes a proper warranty claim to Juniper in writing within the warranty period Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support the Software Any such support shall be governed by a separate written agreement To the maximum ex
185. he chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Place one hand under the PCG to support it and grasp the thumbscrew on the faceplate with the other hand Align the rear of the PCG with the guides inside the chassis and slide it in completely Tighten the thumbscrew on the faceplate to seat the PCG firmly in the chassis Verify that the green LED labeled OK lights steadily which takes about 3 seconds You can also verify correct PCG functioning by issuing the show chassis environment peg command as described in Maintaining the PCGs on page 135 Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner to secure it to the chassis For complete instructions see Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109 A CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 91 Installing a PCG Replacing a PIC PICs are housed in the FPCs installed in the front of the router as shown in Figure 1 PICs are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removing a PIC does not affect router function except that the PIC no longer receive
186. he impeller cover For complete instructions see Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155 12 Order new fuses from an electrical supply house to replace the spares in the J244 group The Cooper Bussman product number for each fuse is GMT X where X is the amperage rating For example product number GMT 15 is a 15 A fuse required for an FPC Figure 106 Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box Table 25 Fuse Specifications J243 J242 Je44 J241 J240 ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD FPC2 15A A et let Jet at xm miu xui x SS are 2212 E 2 2212 FPC1 15A B aleln ie ile IC Ie ec ne a eo FPCO 15A C lolO Olz zm o o See EELSE 5555 EES E SSC J240 A B and C J241 B and D J242 A J243 C and D Indicator Bulb Color Component Fuse Rating J244 D spare i BN 12 A 3 J242 C J243 A J244 C spare i J241 A J242 B and D J245 B J244 B spare m ul ui EE FPC MCS FM PCG J240 D J241 C J244 A spare Replacing Power System Components Troubleshooting Hardware Components This chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems with hardware components installed in the router If you encounter software problems or problems with hardware components not discussed here contact the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC as described in Requesting Support on
187. he thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 3 Grasp the thumbscrews at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the assembly halfway out of the chassis A CAUTION To avoid injury as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch any part of the impeller behind the front panel the impeller might still be spinning 4 When the impeller is no longer spinning slide the assembly completely out of the chassis Figure 77 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ae 1211 Replacing Cooling System Components m 157 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 78 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly Laer 1933 Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly To install the rear upper impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 79 and Figure 80 which show the two types of impeller that can be installed 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis 3 Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover Figure 79 Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly wee 1212 158
188. hermal output oie en Eet tet PAR Pes 7 62 toleranees coe Sv Re 62 tools required chassis installation using mechanical lift 81 installation without mechanical lift 84 returning for repair or replacement 264 CP mantena NCEE mese dete ats boe ien etus 159 hardware components replacing on operational router 159 returning for repair or replacement 264 traceroute Commande 207 transmission distances fiber optic cable 71 troubleshooting CELCO MINAS eite it are bo ero eda 207 Cooling Systemi c seed n dote babes 212 EPG Aen apta etii bb ete etl end 214 USES AA A LAA 211 Index mM 287 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide LEDs craft interface ida ido 208 hardware components 0005 209 OVERVIEWS eege BE AE EE 207 Pla DE 215 POWETS VS io EE ds sl 215 U Hagen vd ata epu 60 unicast routing protocols IV AA En 44 TEVOT dasr ee 46 V M3 5 Cable ae 275 288 HN Index Ww warnings electrical stews dele 227 general tt eve eR 224 installation etie nt EPIRI Pa 259 laser arid LEDs cutie rere p Ra exe er RA EIS 244 levels defiried e i dada ne 221 maintenance and operational s s as 247 wavelength ranges supported by fiber optic cable 71 weight CHASSIS A A 83 hardware components ssssssssssssssssssss 85 wiring electrical See electricity X X21 cable pinouts rta n 273
189. host module becomes the master and the new master Routing Engine resets the Packet Forwarding Engine Routing Engine Hardware Component Overview For host module replacement instructions see Replacing an MCS on page 159 and Replacing a Routing Engine on page 165 Note that the effect of a hardware or software failure on one or both components in the master host module differs from the effect of removing a component that belongs to the master host module W With the default router configuration in case of failure you must correct the problem manually You can issue the appropriate request chassis routing engine master command to switch mastership to the other Routing Engine for example For information about the command see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management On routers with two installed Routing Engines running JUNOS Release 6 0 or later you can configure graceful switchover of Routing Engines as previously described for the case of Routing Engine removal When the standby Routing Engine stops receiving keepalive signals from the master Routing Engine it automatically assumes mastership without interruption of forwarding performance W On routers with two installed Routing Engines running any JUNOS release you can configure automatic Routing Engine mastership failover When the standby Routing Engine stops receiving keepalive signals fro
190. ift or pallet jack to move it Position the crate so that the arrows are pointing up Twist open the locking tabs that secure the crate to the pallet and the front panel to the side panels Remove the front panel from the crate then lift the top and sides off the pallet as a unit See Figure 31 Remove the plastic cover then the foam and Quick Start that are sitting on top of the chassis The installation handle and accessory box are embedded in cutouts in the foam Open the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on the label attached to the box Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the router A generic parts inventory appears in Table 21 Use a 1 2 in open end or socket wrench to loosen and remove the bolts on the brackets that attach the chassis to the pallet If a 1 2 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench rather than a fixed size metric wrench Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws that secure the brackets to the sides of the chassis and remove the brackets Store the brackets screws and bolts inside the accessory box Save the shipping crate packing materials and pallet in case you later need to move or ship the router Unpacking the Router Figure 31 Unpacking the Router Shipping crate cover SS 5
191. ight to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA Refused shipments will be returned to the customer via collect freight For more information about return and repair policies see the customer support Web page at http www juniper net support guidelines html For product problems or technical support issues contact the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or at 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 from outside the United States When you need to return a component follow this procedure 1 Determine the part number and serial number of the component For instructions see Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 255 Return Procedure m 263 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Obtain a Return Materials Authorization RMA number from the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC You can send e mail or telephone as described above Provide the following information in your e mail message or during the telephone call W Part number and serial number of component W Your name organization name telephone number and fax number W Description of the failure The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the component Pack the router or component for shipment as described Packing the Routing Node for Shipment on page 265 or Packing Components for Shipment on
192. incoming PIC interface The PIC passes the packets to the FPC where the Packet Director ASIC distributes them among the I O Manager ASICs The I O Manager ASICs process the packet headers divide the packets into 64 byte data cells and pass the cells through the midplane to the SFMs The Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs on the SFMs distribute the data cells throughout memory buffers located on and shared by all the FPCs For each packet an Internet Processor II ASIC on an SFM performs a route lookup and decides how to forward the packet The Internet Processor II ASIC notifies a Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC of the forwarding decision and the Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC forwards the notification to the FPC that hosts the appropriate outbound interface The I O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles data cells in shared memory into data packets as they are ready for transmission and passes them through the Packet Director ASIC to the outbound PIC The outbound PIC transmits the data packets Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture System Architecture Overview Figure 23 Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data Flow Midplane ln Deel FM EE Duer VO Manager EM ALLEL Manager dice E Sa Eo internet Controller Tee Processor I Packet 27 p EN plena Packet
193. ine in the upper Routing Engine slot RE 0 and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot RE 1 5 Using a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver tighten the screws on the connector 4 Attach the other end of the cable to the console or auxiliary device Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration Figure 58 Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector 1027 Connecting to an External Alarm Reporting Device To connect the router to external alarm reporting devices attach wires to the RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM relay contacts on the CIP A system condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the router They accept wire of any gauge between 24 AWG and 12 AWG 0 20 and 3 33 mm2 which is not provided Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are connecting To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact follow this procedure see Figure 56 1 Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 24 AWG and 12 AWG 0 20 and 3 33 mm2 2 While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact use a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side Insert wires into the slots in the front of the block
194. inside the chassis and slide it in completely Press the ejector handle at each end of the SFM inward Tighten the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab shown in Figure 8 to seat the SFM firmly in the chassis Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift If there are additional SFMs repeat the procedure to reinstall them Figure 54 Reinstalling an SFM Locking tab Ejector handle Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover The rear component cover protects the Routing Engines PCGs MCSs and SFMs as shown in Figure 2 To reinstall the rear component cover follow this procedure 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Hold the component cover up to the rear of the chassis and align the flanges at the top and bottom with the top and bottom of the opening in the chassis 3 Push the cover into place 4 Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover A CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place Reinstalling the Power Supplies The two power supplies are located at the botto
195. ion of the M160 Internet router It discusses the following topics m Rack Requirements on page 59 m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62 W Routing Node Environmental Specifications on page 62 W Fire Safety Requirements on page 63 W Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 64 W Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines on page 70 W Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 W Site Preparation Checklist on page 75 Rack Requirements The router must be installed in a rack Many types of racks are acceptable including front mount racks 4 post telco racks and center mount racks An example of a center mount rack appears in Figure 26 The following sections describe rack requirements W Rack Size and Strength on page 60 W Spacing of Mounting Holes on page 61 W Connection to Building Structure on page 62 Rack Requirements m 59 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Rack Size and Strength 60 The router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either of the following standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m A 600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard for equipment practice document numbers ETS 300 119 1 through 119 4 pub
196. is below the FPC card cage and cable management system see Figure 61 To remove the air filter follow this procedure 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the air filter cover 3 Grasp the edges of the air filter and pull it away from the front of the chassis 4 Inspect the filter for dust dirt and holes If needed clean it as described in Cleaning the Air Filter on page 129 or replace it Maintaining Cooling System Components Maintaining Hardware Components Figure 61 Removing the Air Filter Air filter cover Air intake cover Air filter Cleaning the Air Filter To clean the air filter follow this procedure 1 Pull the filter free of the air filter cover see Figure 62 2 Rinse the filter with water running the water from the back side to the front side to help remove dust and particles accumulated in the filter 3 Allow the filter to dry completely 4 Press the filter back into the air filter cover Figure 62 Removing the Filter from the Air Filter Cover Air filter 1235 Air filter cover Installing the Air Filter To install the air filter follow this procedure see Figure 63 1 A
197. itettua Paikka johon p sy on rajoitettua tarkoittaa paikkaa johon vain huoltohenkil st p see jonkin erikoisty kalun lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten henkil iden valvoma Attention Cet appareil est installer dans des zones d acc s r serv Ces derni res sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut acc der en utilisant un outil sp cial un m canisme de verrouillage et une cl ou tout autre moyen de s curit L acc s aux zones de s curit est sous le contr le de l autorit responsable de l emplacement Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschr nktem Zutritt vorgesehen Ein Bereich mit beschr nktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich zu dem nur Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs Schlo und Schl ssel oder anderer Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat und der von dem f r die Anlage zust ndigen Gremium kontrolliert wird Avvertenza Questa unit deve essere installata in un area ad accesso limitato Un area ad accesso limitato e un area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite un attrezzo speciale lucchetto o altri dispositivi di sicurezza ed controllata dall autorit responsabile della zona Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i omr der med begrenset adgang Et omr de med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et spesielt verkt y las og
198. l or remote upgrades m Monitoring efficiency and flexibility The router supports functions such as alarm handling and packet counting on every port without degrading packet forwarding performance The Routing Engine constructs and maintains one or more routing tables see Figure 25 From the routing tables the Routing Engine derives a table of active routes called the forwarding table which is then copied into the Packet Forwarding Engine The design of the ASICs allow the forwarding table in the Packet Forwarding Engine to be updated without interrupting forwarding performance Figure 25 Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table Updates Routing protocol process NE Forwarding table Routing Engine Routing protocol updates packets from network Forwarding table Packet Forwarding Packets Engines out z Routing Engine Architecture M 55 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 56 MH Routing Engine Architecture Part 2 Initial Installation W Preparing for Router Installation on page 59 m Unpacking the Router on page 77 W Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81 W Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift on page 83 W Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration on page 111 Initial Installation MW 57 58 NW Initial Installation Preparing for Router Installation This chapter describes how to prepare your site for installat
199. labeled MCS O and MCS 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 Each MCS weighs approximately 2 5 lb 1 kg To remove the MCSs follow this procedure see Figure 34 Ae Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Push the end of each extractor clip located at each end of the MCS outward Grasp the extractor clips and slide the MCS about halfway out of the chassis Place one hand under the MCS to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag If a second MCS is installed repeat the procedure to remove it Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Figure 34 Removing an MCS Extractor clip Removing the PCGs The router has two PCGs installed in the slots labeled PCG O and PCG 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 Each PCG weighs approximately 1 Ib 0 5 kg To remove the PCGs follow this procedure see Figure 35 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding str
200. lations Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te worden afgedankt Varoitus T m n tuotteen lopullisesta h vitt misest tulee huolehtia kaikkia valtakunnallisia lakeja ja s nn ksi noudattaen Attention La mise au rebut d finitive de ce produit doit tre effectu e conform ment toutes les lois et r glementations en vigueur Warnung Dieses Produkt mu den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend entsorgt werden Avvertenza Leliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet m skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og forskrifter Aviso A descartagem final deste produto dever ser efectuada de acordo com os regulamentos e a legisla o nacional Atenci n El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse seg n todas las leyes y regulaciones nacionales Varning Slutlig kassering av denna produkt b r sk tas i enlighet med landets alla lagar och f reskrifter Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Agency Approvals The router complies with the following standards W Safety CAN CSA 22 2 No 60950 00 UL 1950 Third Edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Part 1 Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology
201. lectromagnetic shielding do not operate the router without the rear component cover in place Figure 82 Installing an MCS 162 Do ein 5 Ny Extractor clip Replacing Host Module Components Replacing Hardware Components Removing and Insert the PC Card The slot labeled PC CARD on the Routing Engine faceplate accepts a Type I PC card as defined in the PC Card Standard published by the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA The router is shipped with a PC card that contains JUNOS Internet software The PC card can be used to copy JUNOS software from the PC card onto the Routing Engine You can also copy JUNOS software from the Routing Engine onto a PC card for example to create a backup copy of upgrade software that you have obtained from Juniper Networks Instructions for copying software to a PC card are available at the Juniper Networks Support Web site http www juniper net support after logging in navigate to the Customer Support Center then to the download page for JUNOS Internet software ea NOTE The appearance and position of electronic components or the PC card slot on your Routing Engine might differ from the figures in this section These differences do not affect Routing Engine installation and removal or functionality Ce NOTE The software on a PCMCIA card is loaded only onto the Routing Engine into which the PCMCIA card is inserted
202. ling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber cladding higher order mode loss HOL results Together these factors limit the transmission distance of multimode fiber compared to single mode fiber Single mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light can reflect internally through one layer only Interfaces with single mode optics use lasers as light sources Lasers generate a single wavelength of light which travels in a straight line through the single mode fiber Compared with multimode fiber single mode fiber has higher bandwidth and can carry signals for longer distances It is consequently more expensive For information about the maximum transmission distance and supported wavelength range for the types of single mode and multimode fiber optic cable used by PICs on the M160 router see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide Exceeding the maximum transmission distances can result in significant signal loss which causes unreliable transmission The router uses optical lasers for SONET SDH PIC single mode interfaces These optics comply with IR 1 of Bellcore GR 253 CORE Issue 2 December 1995 and ANSI TI 105 06 Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber Optic Cable Correct functioning of an optical data link depends on modulated light reaching the receiver with enough power to be demodulated correctly Attenuation is the reduction in power of the light signal as it is transmitted Attenuation is caused by passive media components su
203. lished by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the router s front support posts and center mounting brackets which measure 19 in 48 3 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis s external dimensions 35 in 89 cm high 29 in 73 6 cm deep and 17 5 in 44 5 cm wide The outer edges of the front support posts and center mounting brackets extend the width to 19 in 48 3 cm The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack that are specified in Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62 NOTE The router might not fit into an 800 mm deep cabinet even if you adjust the front to back position of the front mounting rails inside the cabinet If you mount the router in a cabinet be sure that ventilation is sufficient to prevent overheating In general a center mount rack is preferable to a front mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center mount rack provides greater stability If a front mount rack is used we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure The chassis height of 35 in 89 cm is approxima
204. lly oriented fuse in the groups labeled J241 through J243 in Figure 106 and side to side for a horizontally oriented fuse in the group labeled J240 If the cover slips off the fuse snap the cover back into place and begin again NOTE We recommend you use an insulated fuse removal tool to remove fuses 6 Remove the appropriate spare fuse from the group of fuses labeled J244 in Figure 106 The labels shown in the figure do not appear on the actual fuses the clear cover on every fuse reads BUSS GMT X but a table on the midplane below the fuse box displays the same information Verify that the spare has the same rating and color coding as the fuse it is replacing as specified in Table 25 To see the indicator bulb and printed rating look at the fuse from the side 7 Fora vertically oriented fuse orient the replacement fuse over the slot so that the text on the fuse cover BUSS GMT X reads from bottom to top For a horizontally oriented fuse orient the replacement fuse over the slot so that the text on the fuse cover is upside down 8 Press the new fuse into the slot 9 Power on the router as described in Powering On the Router on page 119 10 Verify that the amber LED under the replacement fuse is no longer lit Replacing Power System Components m 205 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 11 Reinstall the rear lower impeller by sliding it back into the chassis and tightening the thumbscrew at each corner of t
205. loa ide pr et git i 16 description hardware and function 14 installation instructions during initial installation 101 for maintenance or replacement 172 LEDS icis dd sob taut tare ETERNI VERA 51 offline BUON rdc dete peret tg c trs 51 removal instructions during initial installation ooo 94 for maintenance or replacement 170 serial number iii 259 Index WM 281 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide tools required aisi rei tard cid 139 troubleshooting lat EA 214 typesXFPCI ap EPC2 s 1 teres ee a 17 WOIBPI deas al est DR ERROR E ENTRATE 85 FPC1 and FPC2 See FPC FPCs mantenan CEs sy jos a pe Sok teet die ai Sande 55 Status Check o oen poete eoe e ren 55 front impeller assembly installation instructions during initial installation 00 for maintenance or replacement 54 MAINTENANCE seen eae vast e CHER d ends 30 removal instructions during initial installation 96 for maintenance or replacement 51 CL scere et ges tenth tena 59 troubleshooting vv 212 Wet teretes io dede pesadas veda ed 85 front mount rack See rack ERUS qs axa ells edet t od eee b tad eb 4 fuses description hardware and function 59 replacement of blown n usisain rrr 204 use in troubleshooting s ssesecrrrrrrrrr 211 G grounding electrical specifications D powered routet opra e eaa a
206. lowing components For complete specifications see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide For information about pinouts for PIC cable connectors see Cable Connector Pinouts on page 269 W One or more cable connector ports Accept a network media connector W LEDs Indicate PIC and port status Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on the PIC faceplate Some PICs have additional LEDs often one per port The meaning of the LED states differs for various PICs For more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide W Offline button Prepares the PIC for removal from the FPC when pressed For the PICs that install on an FPC1 the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier For the PICs that install on an FPC2 the offline button is on the PIC faceplate See Figure 6 Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs 14 Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs house the PICs that connect the router to network media for information about PICs see Physical Interface Cards PICs on page 15 The main function of an FPC is to connect the PICs installed in it to the other router components An I O Manager ASIC on the FPC divides each incoming data packet into 64 byte cells and passes the cells through the midplane to the SFM where another ASIC decides how to distribute them among the memory buffers located on and shared by all installed FPCs After the SFM decides how to forward a packet an I O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles th
207. lt in an explosion Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant aanbevolen is Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden Varoitus R j hdyksen vaara jos akku on vaihdettu v r n akkuun K yt vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman tai vastaavantyyppist akkua joka on valmistajan suosittelema H vit k ytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan Attention Danger d explosion si la pile n est pas remplac e correctement Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou quivalent recommand e par le fabricant Jeter les piles usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non installata correttamente Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dal produttore Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore Advarsel Det kan v re fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes
208. ly one is active the master the second host module is in standby mode and performs no functions By default the master host module is the one with components installed in the RE O and MCS O slots To change the default master Routing Engine include the appropriate edit chassis redundancy routing engine statement in the configuration as described in the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide Getting Started The host module components are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removal or failure of one or both components in the standby host module does not affect router function If one or both components in the master host module is removed from the chassis the effect depends on whether two host modules are installed m If there is only one host module packet forwarding halts until both the Routing Engine and MCS are reinstalled and functioning normally W here are two host modules the effect depends on the software configuration If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6 0 or later and are configured for graceful switchover the standby Routing Engine automatically assumes mastership without interruption of forwarding performance For information about configuring graceful switchover see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide Getting Started Otherwise forwarding halts while standby
209. m relay contact on the connector interface panel CIP as described in Alarm 28 Craft Interface Hardware Component Overview Relay Contacts on page 34 The LCD on the craft interface reports the cause of the alarm as described in LCD Alarm Mode on page 30 To deactivate red and yellow alarms press the button labeled ACO LT for alarm cutoff lamp test which is located to the left of the alarm LEDs Deactivating an alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached to the corresponding alarm relay contact on the CIP However the LCD continues to report the alarm message until you clear the condition that caused the alarm Table 9 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more detail Table 9 Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button Red On steadily Critical alarm LED Indicates a critical condition O that can cause the router to stop functioning Possible causes include component removal failure or overheating Yellow On steadily Warning alarm LED Indicates a serious but Cy nonfatal error condition such as a maintenance alert or a significant increase in component temperature Alarm cutoff lamp test button Deactivates red and yellow alarms Causes all LEDs on the craft interface to light for testing purposes when pressed and held LCD and Navigation Buttons A four line LCD is located in the craft interface along with six navigation buttons The LCD operates in two m
210. m Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 72 Removing the Screws along the Top Front Edge of the Front Impeller Assembly Top Down View Upper impeller N Screws N NS m d 3 e Ka Craft interface 1592 Figure 73 Removing the Craft Interface Hook Window Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly To attach the craft interface to the front impeller assembly follow this procedure 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Place the replacement impeller assembly top side up on an antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Replacing Cooling System Components m 153 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 3 Attach the craft interface to the front of the impeller assembly making sure that the hooks on the back of the craft interface clip securely into the windows on the front of the impeller assembly see Figure 73 4 Align the holes in the three semicircular metal tabs on the back of the craft interface with the corresponding holes in the top of the impeller assembly 5 Insert the screws you saved when removing the craft interface into the three holes and tighten using a Phillips screwdriver see Figure 72
211. m rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 To reinstall the power supplies follow this procedure see Figure 55 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 109 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Verify that the power switch for each power supply is in the OFF 0 position The switches are on the circuit breaker box Place one hand under the power supply and grasp a handle on the faceplate with the other hand Slide the power supply into the chassis until it contacts the midplane Starting with the bottom screws tighten but do not overtighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate Repeat the procedure to reinstall the second power supply To continue the installation proceed to Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration on page 111 Figure 55 Reinstalling a Power Supply 110 g001919 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Chapter 9 Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration After installing the router into the rack as described in Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81 or Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift on page 83
212. m the master Routing Engine it automatically assumes mastership Packet forwarding halts while the Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect to the new master Routing Engine For information about configuring graceful switchover or automatic mastership failover see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide Getting Started For more information about host module components see the following sections W Routing Engine on page 23 W Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS on page 25 The Routing Engine is an Intel based PCI platform that runs JUNOS Internet software Software processes that run on the Routing Engine maintain the routing tables manage the routing protocols used on the router control the router s interfaces control some chassis components and provide the interface for system management and user access to the router For a description of the Routing Engine s role in router architecture see Routing Engine Architecture on page 55 One or two host modules paired Routing Engine and MCS can be installed into the midplane from the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 5 If two host modules are installed the Routing Engines together determine which is Host Module M 23 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 24 the master and which is in standby mode and so performs no functions By default the Routing Engine in the slot labeled REO is the master The ma
213. mal operation both PCGs generate a 125 MHz clock signal but only one is designated as the master The modules and ASICs in the Packet Forwarding Engine that use the clock signal to gate packet processing use only the signal from the master PCG For information about determining which PCG is the master see Maintaining the PCGs on page 135 PCGs are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removal or failure of the backup PCG does not affect router function If the master PCG fails or is removed from the chassis however the Packet Forwarding Engine resets so that the components start using the signal from the other PCG which becomes the master Packet forwarding halts while there is no clock signal because the Packet Forwarding Engine does not accept incoming packets To replace a PCG perform the following procedures W Removing a PCG on page 176 m Installing a PCG on page 178 Removing a PCG To remove a PCG follow this procedure see Figure 90 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 176 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components
214. mands to manage the router The set of ports labeled HOSTO connects to the Routing Engine in the slot labeled RE 0 and the set labeled HOST1 connects to the Routing Engine in the slot labeled RE 1 Connector Interface Panel CIP m 33 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide The ports with the indicated label in each set function as follows W ETHERNET Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection to a management LAN or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection for out of band management The port uses an autosensing RJ 45 connector to support both 10 and 100 Mbps connections Two small LEDs on the left edge of the port indicate the connection in use the LED labeled ETHERNET lights yellow or green for a 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps connection and the LED labeled ACT lights green when traffic is passing through the port m CONSOLE Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through an RS 232 EIA 232 serial cable W AUXILIARY Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop modem or other auxiliary device through an RS 252 EIA 252 serial cable For information about the pinouts for the connectors see Cable Connector Pinouts on page 269 Figure 15 shows the ports that connect to the Routing Engine installed in slot RE O The arrangement of ports for the Routing Engine installed in slot RE 1 is the same Figure 15 Routing Engine Interface Ports for Host Module 0 O HOST Ethernet W Ethernet port LEDs
215. master PCG fails or is removed from the chassis however the Packet Forwarding Engine resets so that the components start using the signal from the other PCG which becomes the master Packet forwarding halts while there is no clock signal because the Packet Forwarding Engine does not accept incoming packets For PCG replacement instructions see Replacing a PCG on page 176 18 1H Packet Forwarding Engine Hardware Component Overview PCG Components Each PCG shown in Figure 7 has the following components W Signal generator Provides a 125 MHz system clock signal E EEPROM Stores the serial number and revision level of the PCG m Three LEDs Indicate PCG status There is a blue one labeled MASTER a green one labeled OK and an amber one labeled FAIL Table 6 describes the LED states W Offline button Prepares the PCG for removal from the router when pressed Figure 7 Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator Offline button Table 6 States for PCG LEDs uae Color state pesn MASTER On steadily PCG is master Green On steadily PCG is functioning normally PCG is starting up FAIL On steadily PCG has failed Switching and Forwarding Module SFM The Switching and Forwarding Module SFM performs route lookup filtering and switching on incoming data packets then directs outbound packets to the appropriate FPC for transmission to the network It can process 40 million packets per second
216. mation on page 221 m Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255 W Cable Connector Pinouts on page 269 Appendixes MW 219 220 HN Appendixes efe A afety and Regulatory Compliance Information To install and use the router safely follow proper safety procedures This chapter discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information W Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 221 m Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 222 W Agency Approvals on page 255 W Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 254 Definition of Safety Warning Levels This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings D NOTE You might find this information helpful in a particular situation or might otherwise overlook it AN CAUTION You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the router WARNING This symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van sta
217. me that power is disconnected from a circuit Always check the circuit before starting to work Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area such as moist floors ungrounded power extension cords and missing safety grounds Operate the router within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions For the router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment and make certain they are in good condition Many router components can be removed and replaced without powering down or disconnecting power to the router as detailed in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Never install equipment if it appears damaged DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines The following electrical safety guidelines apply to DC powered routers DC powered routers are equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power requirements of a maximally configured router To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 65 A 48 VDC The 48 VDC facility DC source should be equipped with a circuit breaker rated at 90 A minimum Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring Be sure to connect the Safety Guidelines and Warnings Mm 229 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 230 ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground A closed loop ring is r
218. ment LAN For more information see Routing Engine Management Ports on page 33 For information about using the CLI to display details about alarms generated by interfaces and hardware components see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 For information about using the CLI to troubleshoot the JUNOS Internet software see the appropriate JUNOS Internet software configuration guide The LEDs described in the following sections indicate the basic status of hardware components LEDs on the Craft Interface The craft interface provides status and troubleshooting information at a glance It is located on the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage as shown in Figure 1 The LEDs on the craft interface include the following W Alarm The circular red alarm LED at the upper left of the craft interface indicates a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown The triangular yellow alarm next to it indicates a less severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance Both alarms can occur simultaneously When an alarm LED is lit the LCD describes the cause of the alarm For more information about the alarm LEDs see Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button on page 28 For more information about the causes of alarms see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 m FPC For each of the FPC slots in the router there are two LEDs and an offline button located on the craft interface
219. minals which are labeled 48V Install another washer and nut in that order on each terminal stud to secure the power cable lug Using a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench tighten the nuts Verify that the source power cabling and the grounding cabling are correct that they are not touching or blocking access to router components and that they do not drape where people could trip on them Replace the protective shield over the terminal studs and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws Figure 60 Connecting Power and Grounding Cables Nut Cable lug Flat washer Nut Grounding points To ground EE Flat washer Terminal studs g001226 Powering On the Router To power on the router follow this procedure 1 Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the thumbscrews on their faceplates are tightened Providing Power to the Router m 119 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 120 2 For each power supply verify that the source power cables are connected to the appropriate terminal on the circuit breaker box the positive source cable to the return terminal labeled RTN and the negative source cable to the input terminal labeled 48V 3 Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the Routing Engine ports on the CIP AUXILIARY CONSOLE or ETHERNET For more information on connecting management devices
220. mly in the FPC A CAUTION Slide the PIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the bottom of the PIC 4 Tighten the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate simultaneously and at about the same rate tightening the two screws alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the FPC slot making it difficult to turn the screws Verify that the PIC is seated properly 5 If the PIC uses fiber optic cable remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver and the end of each cable AY WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes AN CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 6 Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIC 7 Arrange each cable in the cable management system to prevent the cable from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape A CAUTION
221. mpeller Assembly If you are replacing the front impeller assembly and the replacement assembly does not have a craft interface panel on the front you must transfer the craft interface from the removed assembly to the replacement assembly To remove the craft interface from the removed impeller assembly follow this procedure 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Place the removed and replacement impeller assemblies top side up on antistatic mats If not immediately transferring the craft interface panel to the replacement assembly place an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag on a flat stable surface to receive it Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screws from the three semicircular metal tabs on the back of the craft interface that secure it to the impeller assembly see Figure 72 Save the screws Grasp the ends of the craft interface pull upward to release the hooks on the back of it from the windows on the front of the impeller assembly then pull it toward you to free the craft interface completely see Figure 73 If not immediately transferring it to a replacement impeller assembly place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat Replacing Cooling Syste
222. mperature hot threshold red alarm and automatic shutdown of the power supplies For more information about impeller related alarms see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 To troubleshoot the fans and impellers follow these guidelines If the red alarm LED on the craft interface lights check the LCD on the craft interface for the source of the problem The display reports the number of alarm conditions and the source of each alarm as described in LCD Alarm Mode on page 30 For a list of messages see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 Issue the following CLI command for more information about the source of an alarm condition user host gt show chassis alarms If the blue OUTPUT OK LED on an enhanced power supply or the amber NO AIRFLOW LED on an original power supply is blinking the airflow passing by the power supply might be insufficient Place your hand near the exhaust vents at the rear of the chassis to determine whether the impellers are expelling air If both power supplies have failed the system temperature might have exceeded the threshold causing the system to shut down See All LEDs on Both Supplies Are Off on page 215 If the LCD on the craft interface reports failure of only one impeller and the other impellers are functioning normally the impeller is probably faulty and needs to be replaced For replacement instructions see Replacing Hardware Componen
223. mverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast Varoitus Varmista ett tasavirtapiiriss ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista Varmistaaksesi ett virta on KATKAISTU t ysin paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin k nn suojakytkin KATKAISTU asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin ett se pysyy KATKAISTU asennossa Attention Avant de pratiquer l une quelconque des proc dures ci dessous v rifier que le circuit en courant continu n est plus sous tension Pour en tre s r localiser le disjoncteur situ sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu placer le disjoncteur en position ferm e OFF et l aide d un ruban adh sif bloquer la poign e du disjoncteur en position OFF Warnung Vor Ausf hrung der folgenden Vorg nge ist sicherzustellen da die Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erh lt Um sicherzustellen da amp samtlicher Strom abgestellt ist machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher f r die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS Stellung fest Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti verificare che il circuito CC non sia alimentato Per verificare che tutta l alimentazione sia scollegata OFF individuare l interruttore automatico sul
224. n kkel eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning og det kontrolleres av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for omr det Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalac o em reas de acesso restrito Uma rea de acesso restrito uma rea qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de servico autorizado que possua uma ferramenta chave e fechadura especial ou qualquer outra forma de seguranca Esta rea controlada pela autoridade respons vel pelo local jAtenci n Esta unidad ha sido disenada para instalarse en reas de acceso restringido rea de acceso restringido significa un rea a la que solamente tiene acceso el personal de servicio mediante la utilizaci n de una herramienta especial cerradura con llave o alg n otro medio de seguridad y que est bajo el control de la autoridad responsable del local Varning Denna enhet r avsedd f r installation i omr den med begr nsat tilltr de Ett omr de med begr nsat tilltr de f r endast tilltr das av servicepersonal med ett speciellt verktyg l s och nyckel eller annan s kerhetsanordning och kontrolleras av den auktoritet som ansvarar f r omr det Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage Many router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 50 V You can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulat
225. n Supplied Length Receptacle Routing Engine RS 232 EIA 232 One 6 ft 1 83 m 6 ft 1 83 m DB 9 male console or serial cable ength with auxiliary DB 9 DB 9 interface connectors Routing Engine Category 5 cable or One 15 ft 4 57 m 328 ft 100 m RJ 45 Ethernet equivalent suitable length with autosensing interface for 100BaseT RJ 45 RJ 45 Operation connectors Alarm relay Wire with gauge contacts between 24 AWG and 12 AWG 0 20 and 3 33 mm Site Preparation Checklist The checklist in Table 20 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site for router installation Table 20 Site Preparation Checklist Verify that environmental factors such as temperature and humidity do not exceed router tolerances see Routing Node Environmental Specifications on page 62 Measure distance between external power sources o router installation site Select the Select the type of rack or cabinet of rack or cabinet Plan rack or cabinet location including required space clearances If a rack is used secure rack to floor and building structure Site Preparation Checklist m 75 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Locate sites for connection of system grounding 76 W Site Preparation Checklist Chapter 6 Unpacking the Router This chapter explains how to unpack the router and verify the parts received Before beginning prepare the installation site as described in Preparing for Route
226. n voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessa on noudatettava erityisi varotoimia j rjestelm n vakavuuden s ilytt miseksi jotta v ltyt n loukkaantumiselta Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen Jos telineess ei ole muita laitteita aseta laite telineen alaosaan Jos laite asetetaan osaksi t ytettyyn telineeseen aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineell ja siirry sitten sen yl osaan Jos telinett varten on vakaimet asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siin Attention Pour viter toute blessure corporelle pendant les op rations de montage ou de r paration de cette unit en casier il convient de prendre des pr cautions sp ciales afin de maintenir la stabilit du syst me Les directives ci dessous sont destin es assurer la protection du personnel Le rack sur lequel est mont le Juniper Networks router doit tre fix la structure du b timent Si cette unit constitue la seule unit mont e en casier elle doit tre plac e dans le bas Si cette unit est mont e dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en pla ant l l ment le plus lourd dans le bas Si le casier est quip de dispositifs stabilisateurs in
227. nchronizing the Packet Forwarding Engine s forwarding table with the master forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine Routing Engine Software Components m 49 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software The JUNOS CLI is the primary tool for accessing and controlling the JUNOS Internet software You use it when accessing the router through the console or a connection to an out of band management network The CLI includes commands for configuring router hardware the JUNOS Internet software and network connectivity The JUNOS CLI is a straightforward command interface You type commands on a single line and enter the commands by pressing the Enter key The CLI provides command help and command completion as well as Emacs style keyboard sequences for moving around on a command line and scrolling through a buffer that contains recently executed commands For more information about the CLI see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Tools for Monitoring the Software In addition to commands for configuring router hardware and software the CLI includes commands for monitoring and troubleshooting hardware software routing protocols and network connectivity CLI commands display information from routing tables information specific to routing protocols and information about network connectivity derived from the ping and traceroute utilities You can also use the JUNOS Internet software
228. nd of the replacement Ethernet cable into the appropriate ETHERNET port Figure 66 shows the external device ports on the CIP The ports labeled HOST O connect to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot RE 0 and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot RE 1 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the network device Figure 67 Ethernet Cable Connector 146 lt lt D Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable 9001063 To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine connect it to the appropriate CONSOLE port on the CIP To use a laptop modem or other auxiliary device connect it to the appropriate AUXILIARY port on the CIP Both ports accept an RS 232 EIA 232 serial cable with DB 9 DB 9 connectors One such cable is provided with the router If you want to connect a device to both ports you must supply another cable For cable specifications see Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74 To connect a management console or auxiliary device follow this procedure 1 Ifa cable is already installed in the CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port perform the following steps a Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables Replacing Hardware Components b Unscrew the screws that secure the cable connector to the port using a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver if necessar
229. ndaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen Definition of Safety Warning Levels mM 221 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Varoitus Tama varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Olet tilanteessa joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan Ennen kuin ty skentelet mink n laitteiston parissa ota selv s hk kytkent ihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehk isykeinoista Attention Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement soyez conscient des dangers pos s par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation die zu einer K rperverletzung f hren k nnte Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Ger t beginnen seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unf llen bewu t Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan f re til personskade F
230. ng Taxes arising from the purchase of the license or importation or use of the Software 11 Export Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign agency or authority and not to export or re export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws or regulations or without all necessary approvals Customer shall be liable for any such violations The version of the Software supplied to you may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting your ability to export the Software without an export license 12 Commercial Computer Software The Software is commercial computer software and is provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227 7201 through 227 7202 4 FAR 12 212 FAR 27 405 b 2 FAR 52 227 19 or FAR 52 227 14 ALT III as applicable 13 Miscellaneous This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles For any disputes arising under this Agreement the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of and venue in the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County California This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the
231. ng during initial installation 114 Teplacitig Loreto iste etd te oe 146 tools TEQUES ceca data ete puel 159 Index mM 279 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide fiber optic attenudtlot diim dex va TEE ERG 71 cleaning instructions for transceivers 134 GISPETSION 3 0 EE E EH 71 multimode and single mode 71 transmission distance maximum 71 wavelength ranges isses 71 grounding See power and grounding cables PIC connecting during initial installation 115 connecting during maintenance 186 dISCONNECIAS erotico 185 MAINTAINING rs ve dex tea ede 154 tools required A p Pe 139 power and grounding connecting during initial installation 117 connecting during maintenance 202 disconnecting for maintenance 200 tools required is uec tee eret prpEMERS 139 cable management system description ios sue ete ter e ta epulas 41 fiber optic cable use with 134 EISE enee de E Aer ee 83 carton See shipping crate case number for TAG cede leve geb RAT ERA 265 center mount rack See rack chassis airflow path rouge 40 alarm messages See alarm messages OESCEIB IOET ebe ic libreta 7 rounding ie dar ane is 7 lifting guidelines sss 259 process software module in Routing Engine 49 Welght exte d vv nds eins 85 checklist EPC removal sos esee te pete ORTA 94 checklist for site preparation ooooocccccccccccccc
232. ng the two screws Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the FPC slot making it difficult to turn the screws 8 Slide the PIC out of the FPC card carrier and place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat 9 Ifyou are not reinstalling a PIC into the emptied PIC slot within a short time install a blank PIC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the FPC card cage Figure 92 Removing a PIC Installing a PIC To install a PIC follow this procedure see Figure 93 and Figure 94 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components m 181 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 182 2 Ifthe PIC uses fiber optic cable verify that there is a rubber safety cap over each transceiver on the faceplate Install a cap if necessary 3 Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the PIC slot in the FPC and then slide the PIC in until it lodges fir
233. nnects the router to network media such as OC 12 STM 4 OC 48 STM 16 Ethernet and channelized interfaces PICs are housed in Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs Quad wide PICs such as the OC 192 STM 64 SONET SDH PIC are exceptions Such PICs occupy Packet Forwarding Engine m 11 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide an entire FPC slot in the chassis and insert directly into the slot rather than into an FPC card carrier m Flexible PIC Concentrator FPC Processes incoming and outgoing packets Up to eight FPCs plug into the midplane from the front of the chassis Each FPC accommodates up to four PICs m Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator PCG Sends clock signals to the other Packet Forwarding Engine components Two PCGs plug into the midplane from the rear of the chassis W Switching and Forwarding Module SFM Performs route lookup filtering and switching Up to four SFMs plug into the midplane from the rear of the chassis For information about Packet Forwarding Engine components see the following sections W Midplane on page 12 W Physical Interface Cards PICs on page 13 m Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs on page 14 m Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators PCGs on page 18 W Switching and Forwarding Module SFM on page 19 Midplane The midplane is a panel located in the center of the chassis running from side to side and forming the rear of the FPC card cage see Figure 4 All router componen
234. nstrumentos pticos jAtenci n No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos pticos Varning Rikta inte blicken in mot str len och titta inte direkt p den genom optiska instrument Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning A WARNING Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable is connected avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua n kym t nt s teily kun kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettyn v lt s teilylle altistumista l k katso avoimiin aukkoihin Attention Des radiations invisibles l il nu pouvant traverser l ouverture du port lorsqu aucun c ble en fibre optique n y est connect il est recommand de ne pas regarder fixement l int rieur de ces ouvertures Warnung Aus der Port ffnung k nnen unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist Vermeiden Sie es sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen und starren Sie nicht in die Offnungen Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti radiazioni invisibili possono essere emesse attraverso l apertu
235. ntact your Juniper Networks representative about approved packaging materials Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software If two Routing Engines are installed also issue the command on the backup Routing Engine user host gt request system halt Cem NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference Packing the Routing Node for Shipment m 265 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 266 Shut down power to the router by pressing the power switch for all power supplies to the off 0 position The switches are on the circuit breaker box Disconnect power from the router For instructions see Disconnecting and Connecting Power on page 200 Remove the cables that connect to all external devices For instructions see Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 146 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 146 Repl
236. ntly cleaning them as necessary For more information see Maintaining Hardware Components on page 127 62 1H Routing Node Environmental Specifications Preparing for Router Installation Table 15 Routing Node Environmental Specifications CT TO No performance degradation to 10 000 ft 3048 m Relative humidity Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5 to 90 noncondensing Temperature Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32 F 0 C to 104 F 40 C Non operating storage temperature in shipping crate 40 F 40 C to 158 F 70 C Seismic Tested to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake requirements Maximum thermal output 9400 BTU hour ec NOTE Install the router only in restricted areas such as dedicated equipment rooms and equipment closets in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 For additional safety guidelines and requirements see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 221 Fire Safety Requirements Fire Suppression In the event of a fire emergency involving routers and other network equipment the safety of people is the primary concern You should establish procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency provide safety training and properly provision fire control equipment and fire extinguishers In addition you should establish procedures to protect yo
237. o start it into the chassis then slide it all the way in Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover Reinstalling Components into the Chassis m 103 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 48 Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly Label USE GUIDES WHEN INSTALLING BLOWER ASSEMBLY gt P Guides Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly The rear upper impeller assembly is installed at the top of the chassis rear as shown in Figure 2 To reinstall the assembly follow this procedure see Figure 49 and Figure 50 which show the two types of impeller that can be installed 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis 5 Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover 104 1H Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Figure 49 Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly m di 1212 280090 00309230900 80902090908098 o 030309309 00509022000080 1934 Reinstalling the Routing Engines The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE 0
238. ocumentation xxi e 4 Field Replaceable Units neess A AER RE He 4 6 5 Chassis Physical Specifications cosi dme Eeer dato gs 11 e 6 States dor E EE Ee tt A A A AAA 19 67 States for SEM ET 22 Ee 27 e 9 Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Lamp Test Button 29 e 10 States for Host Module LEDS cusco da exe me e ene de e re en 51 TE States Bop EE LEDS idt ees teeth dos TR Net cabe E eh bate ete fa trot etada 32 e 12 States for Power Supply LEDS 4 EEN ever erede cee Ae enim e PR CURT de 37 e 15 Electrical Specifications for Power Supply iissssssssss 38 e 14 Spacing of Holes on Front Support Post and Center Mounting Bracket 61 e 15 Routing Node Environmental Specifications 00 0 0c cece eee 63 e 16 Component Power Requirements cepopi neat 0 cece cence ee 66 e 17 DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 69 e 18 Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss 73 e 19 Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management and Alarm Interfaces da AS de onde P Trete ae bb be le eds Bees A PAS 75 E ele Be EE 75 e 21 Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis 79 e eet ele LEE 83 e 23 FPC Removal Checklist eee or ENEE ae Vr a AE ata ok 94 e 24 Tools and Parts Reegel geess 140 8 25 FUSE SpecitiC x est oaa NEES 206 E Aere Chassis Alarm Messdges eieiei sde RENE er oar Ehe bur obo tb LERRA 209 e 27 SONET SDH Interface Alarm Messages 210 e
239. odes as described in the following sections W LCD Idle Mode on page 29 W LCD Alarm Mode on page 50 LCD Idle Mode During normal operation the LCD operates in idle mode and reports current status information as shown in Figure 12 Craft Interface m 29 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 12 LCD in Idle Mode Routerl E Up 2 11 259 O O Power OK O 1263 The lines in the display report the following information W First line Routing node name m Second line Length of time the router has been running reported in the following form Up days hours minutes W Third and fourth lines Status messages which rotate at two second intervals Some conditions such as removal or insertion of a system component can interrupt the messages To add a message that alternates every 2 seconds with the default status messages use the set chassis display message command For more information see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management LCD Alarm Mode When a red or yellow alarm occurs the LCD switches to alarm mode and reports about the alarm condition as shown in Figure 13 Figure 13 LCD in Alarm Mode Routerl E 2 R PEM 1 Input Failure C amp D O Y Change air filter O 1264 30 HN Craft Interface Host Module LEDs Hardware Component Overview The lines in the display report the followin
240. ollows Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines m 73 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Pm Pg LL PM 13 dB 2 km 1 0 dB km 5 0 5 dB 2 0 5 dB 0 5 dB HOL 1 dB CRM PM 13 dB 2 dB 2 5 dB 1 dB 0 5 dB 1 dB PM 6 dB The following sample calculation for an 8 km long single mode link with a power budget Pg of 15 dB uses the estimated values from Table 18 to calculate link loss LL as the sum of fiber attenuation 8 km 0 5 dB km or 4 dB and loss for seven connectors 0 5 dB per connector or 5 5 dB The power margin Py is calculated as follows PM Pg LL PM 13 dB 8 km 0 5 dB km 7 0 5 dB 13 dB 4 dB 3 5 dB PM PM 5 5 dB In both examples the calculated power margin is greater than zero indicating that the link has sufficient power for transmission and does not exceed the maximum receiver input power Attenuating to Prevent Saturation at SONET SDH PICs SONET SDH interfaces in the different reach classes short reach SR intermediate reach IR and long reach LR generate different output power levels and tolerate different input power levels Interfaces that have a longer reach can transmit enough power to saturate the receivers on PICs that have a shorter reach Specifically LR interfaces can saturate IR PICs and both IR and LR interfaces can saturate SR PICs Interfaces in the same reach class can also saturate one another To prevent saturation y
241. omatically share the electrical load If a power supply stops functioning for any reason the remaining power supplies instantly begin providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning and can provide full power indefinitely Power supplies are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 To avoid electrical injury carefully follow the instructions in Replacing a Power Supply on page 197 NOTE After powering off a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it back on After powering on a power supply wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence If Power System M 35 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router again first issue the CLI request system halt command For more information see Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 After a power supply is powered on it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators such as LEDs on the power supply show chassis commands and messages on the craft interface LCD to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds Power Supply 36 Power System See the following sections for further information
242. on eroticas ddr 127 small form factor pluggable See SFP SNMP as tool for monitoring sssssssssssssssesse 50 process software module in Routing Engine 49 software JUNOS See JUNOS Internet software SONET SDH analyzer use of 154 Index specifications Cable i dicte tp L D HY PEE 70 power and grounding 5 67 Routing Engine management ports 74 See also cable PIC clearance around ach 62 electrical iii t een etr tdem qid 67 cable arid Witing Lee dett conce tes 65 environmental ls 2x etse te strom Pede 62 ME Sri ER T YEAR YAT 65 power drawn by hardware components 65 SSI eer odes A e 64 power SUPPlY ecocuncriersrni cia b e er EEN AN 36 rack connection to building structure 62 mounting hole spacing sicesresreeree 61 size and strength ci eed eee dees 60 thermal Output Had at 7 62 wires to external alarm reporting devices 74 standards cordpliance coke oie sod RR dee data 253 support technical See technical support Surge PLOLEClION ege dE ENEE E EEN 65 Switching and Forwarding Module See SEM SyMitax CONVENIOS EES NEE AE XX system aT Chile CEUTe EE 51 descriptor get ee EE 3 T T1 PIC pinouts for RJ 48 Cable ooo 270 tables routing and forwarding 22 47 technical support CONTACTING J TAC 12s eroe ve tr ER eee xxiii telco rack See rack temperature acceptable range s sicesierresres 62 t
243. on the PIC faceplate indicates normal functioning which usually takes about 5 seconds The LED is usually green for more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide For the PICs that install on an FPC1 the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier For the PICs that install on an FPC2 the offline button is on the PIC faceplate See Figure 6 m Issue the following CLI command user host gt request chassis pic fpc slot fpc slot pic slot pic slot online For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the PIC is online You can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic status command described in Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 134 Figure 95 Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to a PIC Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components M 187 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Replacing an SFM 188 Up to four SFMs can be installed in the router processing a total of 160 Mpps The SFMs are hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Removing or inserting an SFM causes a brief interruption in forwarding performance about 500 ms as the Packet Forwarding Engine reconfigures the distribution of packets across the remaining SFMs To replace an SFM perform the following procedures m Removing
244. onds after turning it off before turning it back on If you need to power it off again wait for at least 60 seconds after powering it on 3 Shut off the power flowing to the power supply from the external power source so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure 4 Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 5 Grasp the handle or handles on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis 6 Place one hand under the power supply to support it then slide it completely out of the chassis A WARNING Do not touch the power connectors on the rear of the power supply see Figure 102 They can contain dangerous voltages Figure 101 Removing a Power Supply 198 g001918 Replacing Power System Components Replacing Hardware Components Figure 102 Rear of Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors Power supply input connectors Power supply output connectors Installing a Power Supply To install a power supply follow this procedure see Figure 103 L Verify that there is no power flowing to the power supply from the external power source so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during
245. oning normally For more information see FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 31 Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed FPCs As shown in the sample output the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the FPC is functioning normally user host gt show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online 37 4 0 32 1 39 1 Online 39 4 0 32 1 39 2 Empty 3 Online 34 1 0 32 1 40 4 Empty 5 Online 35 4 0 32 2 40 6 Online 36 4 0 32 1 39 7 Empty For more detailed output add the detail option The following example also specifies a slot number 0 which is optional user host gt show chassis fpc detail 0 Slot 0 information State Online Temperature 37 degrees C 98 degrees F Total CPU DRAM 32 MB Total SRAM 4 MB Total SDRAM 256 MB O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number 0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number 0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number 0 O Manager ASIC information Version 2 0 Foundry IBM Part number 0 Start time 2003 04 29 16 11 55 PDT Uptime 5 days 21 hours 32 minutes 41 seconds For further description of the output from the commands see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine
246. onnections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity To connect power to the router follow this procedure see Figure 105 Replacing Power System Components Replacing Hardware Components 1 Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is O V Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure 2 For each power supply verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box is in the OFF 0 position 5 Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground 4 Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with the router to the grounding cable 5 Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the bottom rear of the chassis The grounding points are sized for 1 4 20 UNC screws 6 Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points first with the washers then with the screws CAUTION Do not substitute metric screws such as M6 for the 1 4 20 UNC screws that screw into the grounding points screws other than 1 4 20 UNC screws can strip the threading in the grounding points 7 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen and remove the screws securing the protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Remove the cover 8 Install one flat washer and one nut in that order
247. oom en aarde zijn verbonden en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen Varoitus Ennen kuin ty skentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa ota pois kaikki korut sormukset kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien Metalliesineet kuumenevat kun ne ovat yhteydess s hk virran ja maan kanssa ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liit nt napoihin Attention Avant d acc der cet quipement connect aux lignes lectriques ter tout bijou anneaux colliers et montres compris Lorsqu ils sont branch s l alimentation et reli s la terre les objets m talliques chauffent ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l objet m tallique aux bornes Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Ger ten die an das Netz angeschlossen sind jeglichen Schmuck einschlie lich Ringe Ketten und Uhren abnehmen Metallgegenst nde erhitzen sich wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden und k nnen schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlufklemmen angeschweifit werden Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione togliersi qualsiasi monile inclusi anelli collane braccialetti ed orologi Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo pu saldarsi ai terminali Advarsel Fje
248. ores the serial number of the Routing Engine W Reset button Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed NOTE The LEDs that report host module status and by implication Routing Engine status are on the craft interface rather than the Routing Engine faceplate For more information see Host Module LEDs on page 51 Host Module NOTE The appearance and position of electronic components or the PC card slot on your Routing Engine might differ from Figure 9 and other figures in this Hardware Component Overview document that depict the Routing Engine These differences do not affect Routing Engine installation and removal or functionality For specific information about Routing Engine components for example the amount of SDRAM issue the show chassis routing engine command de NOTE If two Routing Engines are installed they must both be the same version Figure 9 Routing Engine Routing Engine 333 Routing Engine 600 Extractor clip Extractor clip PC card slot Extractor clip ER 1596 Extractor clip Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS The Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS works with its companion Routing Engine to provide control and monitoring functions for router components It also generates a clock signal for the SONET SDH interfaces on the router One or two host modules paired MCS and Routing Engine can be installed into the midplane from the rear of the chassis as shown in Figu
249. ory Compliance Information packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge ESD damage which can cause intermittent or complete component failures W Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin A CAUTION For safety periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap The measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms W When handling any component that is removed from the chassis make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge points on the chassis which are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 m Avoid contact between the component and your clothing ESD voltages emitted from clothing can still damage components m When removing or installing a component always place it component side up on an antistatic surface in an antistatic card rack or in an electrostatic bag see Figure 108 If you are returning a component place it in an electrostatic bag before packing it Figure 108 Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag CAUTION A A ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE Lu DEVICES DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE EXCEPTATA STATIC FREE WORKSTATION 1551 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings When working on equipment powered by electricity follow the guidelines described in the following sections
250. ou might need to attenuate power at the PIC receiver particularly if you know that it has a shorter reach than the interface that is sending the signal Determine the amount of attenuation needed by measuring the power level at each receiver Attenuate the power to bring it within the allowable range for short lengths of fiber with fiber and connector loss close to zero an attenuator of 5 to 10 dB should be sufficient For specifications of minimum and maximum input level receiver sensitivity and receiver saturation and minimum and maximum output level average launch power for the SONET SDH PICs supported on the M160 router see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications For management and service operations you connect the Routing Engine to an external console or management network through ports on the Connector 74 Mm Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications Preparing for Router Installation Interface Panel CIP You can also connect the router to external alarm reporting devices through the alarm relay contacts on the CIP For more information see Connector Interface Panel CIP on page 32 Table 19 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management ports and the wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts Table 19 Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management and Alarm Interfaces Cable Cable Wire Maximum Router Specificatio
251. out no i Director Routing eben Engine ASIC Routing Engine Architecture The Routing Engine is an Intel based PCI platform running the JUNOS Internet software which Juniper Networks has developed and optimized to handle large numbers of network interfaces and routes The software consists of a set of system processes running in protected memory modules on top of an independent operating system The JUNOS kernel supports JUNOS system processes which handle system management processes routing protocols and control functions see Figure 24 The Routing Engine has a dedicated 100 Mbps internal connection to the Packet Forwarding Engine Routing Engine Architecture M 53 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 24 Routing Engine Architecture JUNOS software System Routing Control management protocols functions System processes processes Kernel Operating system Intel based PCI platform 1164 Routing Engine Functions 54 The Routing Engine handles all routing protocol processes as well as the software processes that control the router s interfaces the chassis components system management and user access to the router These routing and software processes run on top of a kernel that interacts with the Packet Forwarding Engine For more information about the processes see Routing Engine Software Components on page 43 The Routing Engine incl
252. outer Hardware Guide State Online Master clock Temperature 40 degrees C 104 degrees F Frequency Setting 125 00 MHz Measurement 125 01 MHz Power ae Y 3274 mv 5 0 V bias 4974 mV 8 0 V bias 8183 mV BUS Revision 12 PCG 1 status State Online Standby Temperature 40 degrees C 104 degrees F Frequency Setting 125 00 MHz Measurement 125 03 MHz Power 3 29 V 3267 mV 5 0 V bias 4993 mV 8 0 V bias 8190 mV BUS Revision 12 For further description of the output from the command see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Maintaining SFMs The router can have a Switching and Forwarding Module SFM in each of the slots labeled SFM 0 through SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 5 To maintain the SFMs perform the following procedures regularly W Check the LEDs on the SFM faceplates The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when an SFM is functioning normally For more information see SFM Components on page 20 m Issue the CLI show chassis sfm command to check the status of the SFMs The following sample output is for a router with four SFMs installed user host gt show chassis sfm Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online 41 3 0 64 19 46 1 Online 42 5 0 64 19 46 2 Online 43 4 0 64 19 46 3 Online 41 3 0 64 19 46 For more detailed output add the detail option
253. outer platform and summarize known problems with the hardware and accompanying software Each platform has its own release notes Contain corrections and updates to the published JUNOScope manual provide information that might have been omitted from the manual and describe upgrade and downgrade procedures Briefly describe Services Router features identify known hardware problems and provide upgrade and downgrade instructions We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation You can send your comments to techpubs commentsGjuniper net or fill out the documentation feedback form at http www juniper net techpubs docbug docbugreport html If you are using e mail be sure to include the following information with your comments E Document name m Document part m Page number number m Software release version Requesting Support For technical support open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 outside the United States Requesting Support W xxiii M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide XXiv W Requesting Support Part 1 Product Overview W System Overview on page 3 W Hardware Component Overview on page 7 W JUNOS Internet Software Overview on page 43 W System Architecture Overview on page 51 Product Overview MW 1 2 W Product Overview Chapter 1
254. outing table Routing policies applied to imported routes control the routes used to determine active routes whereas policies applied to exported routes control which routes a protocol advertises to its neighbors You implement routing policy by defining policies A policy specifies the conditions to use to match a route and the action to perform on the route when a match occurs For example when a routing table imports routing information from a routing protocol a routing policy might modify the route s preference mark the route with a color to identify it for later manipulation or prevent the route from even being installed in a routing table When a routing table exports routes to a routing protocol a policy might assign metric values modify the BGP community information tag the route with additional information or prevent the route from being exported altogether You also can define policies for redistributing the routes learned from one protocol into another protocol The JUNOS software supports several types of VPNs m Layer 2 VPNs A Layer 2 VPN links a set of sites sharing common routing information and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies A Layer 2 VPN is not aware of routes within a customer s network It simply provides private links between a customer s sites over the service provider s existing public Internet backbone m Layer 3 VPNs A Layer 3 VPN links a set of sites that share common ro
255. ower Syste E eet dua wind ite ld ls ls one 35 POWEESUPPl EE 36 AS A e SA EE DEE brutes asd vtae sd 38 PUSES Md A a di 39 Cooling SYSTEM e E Nod A tS an ia ds 39 Cooling System Components ihya eo da aes 40 Airflow through the Chassis 40 Cable Management System rimar A ETUR RR de Rr e ree 41 Chapter 3 JUNOS Internet Software Overview 43 Routing Engine Software Components 00 cece cece eee es 45 Routing Protocol Processa oei ieee e HAG MEA RIO OD t 44 IPv4 Routing Protocols EE 44 PV6 ROUTING Protocols oer py PRE aos eee ete E OUI he 46 Routing and Forwarding Tables respi penei de dee at tds 47 Routing Policy eh Ae iS EE 47 Md 48 Interface PrOCeSS rra dan gat bU OLOR A ded des 49 Clhassis PIOCesS nh sores cR PIG EFE ES 49 SNMP arid MIB II Proeeeeeg ee ENER beta be e Oe obe E 49 Management Process iussi sche ek ad EE nak ERE EE EE n Rd aec d 49 Routing Engine Kernel ode exeo ee E EEN AEN 49 Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software 50 Tools for Monitoring the Software 50 Software peradess iode arte Mime tite togae RR cag tetas usate sd 50 Chapter 4 System Architecture Overview 51 Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture 51 Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine 2 52 Routing Engine Architecture secare ri oreak E eror be pa RA RI tie 53 Routing Engine FUACHONS aceiri esaeran taiea va He Migs dde meda 54 Part 2 Initial Installation Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation 59 Rack Reg
256. p feil m te Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner Aviso Existe perigo de explos o se a bateria for substitu da incorrectamente Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instru es do fabricante Atenci n Existe peligro de explosi n si la bater a se reemplaza de manera incorrecta Reemplazar la bater a exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente recomendado por el fabricante Desechar las bater as gastadas seg n las instrucciones del fabricante 248 HW safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Varning Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Ers tt endast batteriet med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande F lj tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av anv nda batterier Jewelry Removal Warning WARNING Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines remove jewelry including rings necklaces and watches Metal objects heat up when connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the terminals Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden sieraden inclusief ringen kettingen en horloges verwijderen Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met str
257. page xxiii W Overview of Troubleshooting Resources on page 207 W Troubleshooting the Cooling System on page 212 W Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 215 W Troubleshooting the Power System on page 215 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources This section provides an overview of the resources you can use while troubleshooting problems with the router E Command Line Interface on page 207 m LEDs on page 208 m Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 W Blown Fuse Indicators on page 211 W Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 212 Command Line Interface The JUNOS Internet software command line interface CLI is the primary tool for controlling and troubleshooting router hardware the JUNOS Internet software routing protocols and network connectivity CLI commands display information from routing tables information specific to routing protocols and information about network connectivity derived from the ping and traceroute utilities You enter CLI commands on one or more external management devices connected to the Routing Engine through ports on the Connector Interface Panel CIP The port labeled AUXILIARY attaches the Routing Engine to a laptop modem or other auxiliary device the port labeled CONSOLE attaches to a system Overview of Troubleshooting Resources NM 207 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide LEDs 208 console and the port labeled ETHERNET attaches to a manage
258. pc slot pic slot pic slot offline For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference 5 Unplug the cable from the cable connector port If the PIC uses fiber optic cable immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components MN 185 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 186 CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 4 Remove the cable from the cable management system and detach it from the destination port Installing a PIC Cable To install a PIC cable follow this procedure see Figure 95 1 Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC For cable specifications see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide 2 Ifthe PIC cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug remove the plug WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that
259. pe and rating Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions are provided in this manual Such an action could cause severe electrical shock Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame Such an action could result in electrical shock or fire Avoid spilling liquid onto the router chassis or onto any router component Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the router Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected from their power source Such an action could cause electrical shock In addition observe the following warnings and guidelines Qualified Personnel Warning on page 225 Restricted Access Area Warning on page 225 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information W Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Qualified Personnel Warning WARNING Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the router Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja p tev henkil kunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa taman laitteen Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l appareil doit tre r alis par du personnel qualifi et comp tent Warnung Ger t nur von geschultem qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder auswechseln lassen Avvertenza Solo p
260. pecifications Preparing for Router Installation Chassis Grounding To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation the router must be adequately grounded before power is connected A pair of threaded inserts PEM nuts are provided on the right rear of the chassis for connecting the router to earth ground A CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit To ground the router connect a grounding cable to earth ground and then attach it to the chassis grounding points The grounding points are spaced at 0 625 in 15 86 mm centers The accessory box shipped with the router includes the cable lug that attaches to the grounding cable see Figure 28 and the UNC 1 4 20 screws American used to secure the grounding cable to the grounding points The cable lug shown in Figure 28 is also used for the DC power cables The grounding cable must be able to handle up to 82 A Figure 28 Power and Grounding Cable Lug a 2 25 End view mo O Y 2 holes E Crimp area MCN 0 08 0 25 0 63 0 37 All measurements in inches 3 The grounding cable must be 8 AWG 8 4 m2 wire minimum or as permitted by the local code Power Connection and Cable S
261. pecifications To supply power to the router connect power cables to a separate dedicated power source for each power supply and attach the cables to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Most sites distribute power through a main conduit that leads to frame mounted power distribution panels one of which might be located at the top of the rack that houses the router A pair of cables one input and one return connects each set of terminal studs to the power distribution panel AN CAUTION There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications 67 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide breaker box You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity Figure 29 shows a typical source cabling arrangement Figure 29 Typical Source Cabling to the Router Chassis A grounding points Es 7 Een i DN i e e AC er En Central office i al El primary amp secondary AE Hl 2 DC power distribution i S t NIA Lm
262. per Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Copyright 2005 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Copyright 2005 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Writing Sheila Nolte Tony Mauro Jerry Isaac Editing Stella Hackell Illustration Faith Bradford Cover Design Edmonds Design Revision History 25 February 2005 530 007250 01 Revision 5 Correct DC power illustration and replacement procedure 12 November 2004 530 007250 01 Revision 4 Revised fuse replacement procedure 30 June 2003 530 007250 01 Revision 3 Corrected and added component information 15 October 2002 530 007250 01 Revision 2 Incorporated updated technical information synchronized with M40e Internet Router Hardware Guide 15 March 2002 530 007250 01 Revision 1 Incorporated updated technical information 15 October 2001 Incorporated updated technical information 15 May 2001 Adopted new template 28 February 2001 Incorporated updated technical information 31 August 2000 Incorporated updated technical information 31 March 2000 First edition The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Ne
263. ponents Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Figure 96 Removing an SFM Replacing Hardware Components Locking tab 1931 Ejector handle Installing an SFM To install an SFM follow this procedure see Figure 97 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Verify that the ends of the ejector handles are pulled outward to a position nearly perpendicular to the faceplate of the SFM Place one hand under the SFM to support it and grasp one of the ejector handles at the front with the other hand Align the rear of the SFM with the guides inside the chassis and slide it in completely Press the ejector handle at each end of the SFM inward Tighten the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab shown in Figure 8 to seat the SEM firmly in the chassis Press the offline button on the SFM faceplate and hold it down until the green LED labeled OK lights steadily in about 5 seconds You can also verify correct SFM functioning by issuing the show chassis sfm commands described in Maintaining SFMs on page 136 Replacing P
264. ppear during the first 60 seconds 7 Press the other power switch on the circuit breaker box to the ON position and observe the LEDs on the second power supply faceplate They should light as described in the previous step If the LEDs are not lit in the appropriate pattern after 60 seconds repeat the power supply and cable installation procedures described in Reinstalling the Power Supplies on page 109 and Connecting Power to the Router on page 117 8 On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine monitor the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly Providing Power to the Router Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software The router is shipped with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled and ready to be configured when the router is powered on There are three copies of the software one on a nonrotating flash drive in the Routing Engine one on a rotating hard drive in the Routing Engine and one on a PC card that can be inserted into the slot in the Routing Engine faceplate When the router boots it first attempts to start the image on the PC card If a PC card is not inserted into the Routing Engine or the attempt otherwise fails the router next tries the flash drive and finally the hard drive You configure the router by issuing JUNOS command line interface CLI commands either on a console device attached
265. presents variables options for which you substitute a value in commands or configuration statements Represents names of configuration statements commands files and directories IP addresses configuration hierarchy levels or labels on routing platform components Enclose optional keywords or variables Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity Description Indicates important features or instructions Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death used in this guide Examples To enter configuration mode type the configure command user host gt configure user host gt show chassis alarms No alarms currently active E A policy term is a named structure that defines match conditions and actions n JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide n RFC 1997 BGP Communities Attribute Configure the machine s domain name edit root set system domain name domain name To configure a stub area include the stub statement at the edit protocols ospf area area id hierarchy level The console port is labeled CONSOLE stub default metric metric gt broadcast multicast string1 string2 string3 Convention pound sign square brackets Indention and braces
266. proved wiring terminations such as closed loop or spade type with upturned lugs These terminations should be the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is dient u bedrading te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten zoals het gesloten lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen Varoitus Jos s ikeellinen johdin on tarpeen kayta hyvaksyttya johdinliitantaa esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liit nt jossa on ylospain k nnetyt kiinnityskorvat T llaisten liit nt jen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sek eristeen ett johdinosan Attention Quand des fils torsad s sont n cessaires utiliser des douilles terminales homologu es telles que celles circuit ferm ou du type plage ouverte avec cosses rebrouss es Ces douilles terminales doivent tre de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent tre referm es sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist sind zugelassene Verdrahtungsabschl sse z B f r einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelf rmig mit nach oben gerichteten Kab
267. ps PIM dense mode is a flood and prune protocol SAP SDP Session Announcement Protocol and Session Description Protocol handle conference session announcements W MPLS application protocols LDP Label Distribution Protocol provides a mechanism for distributing labels in nontraffic engineered applications LDP allows routers to establish label switched paths LSPs through a network by mapping network layer routing information directly to data link layer switched Routing Engine Software Components m 45 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 46 paths LSPs created by LDP can also traverse LSPs created by Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching enables you to configure LSPs through a network either manually or dynamically You can control how traffic traverses the network by directing it through particular paths rather than relying on an IGP s least cost algorithm to choose a path RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol version 1 provides a mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of the shortest path determined by a routing protocol RSVP itself is not a routing protocol but is designed to operate with current and future unicast and multicast routing protocols JUNOS RSVP software supports dynamic signaling for MPLS LSPs IPv6 Routing Protocols The JUNOS Internet software implements full IP routing functionality providing support for IP version 6 IPv6 The ro
268. r Installation on page 59 and review the safety information in Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 221 especially General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 224 and Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 239 This chapter discusses the following topics W Tools and Parts Required on page 77 W Unpacking the Router on page 77 Tools and Parts Required To unpack the router and prepare for installation you need the following tools W Phillips screwdriver number 2 W 1 2 in or 13 mm open end or socket wrench to remove bracket bolts from the shipping pallet W Blank panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component Unpacking the Router The router is shipped in a wooden crate and bolted to the pallet that forms the bottom of the crate The crate also contains an accessory box the handle used during manual router installation and the M160 Internet Router Installation Quick Start poster Cem NOTE The router is maximally protected inside the shipping crate Do not unpack it until you are ready to begin installation To unpack the router perform these steps 1 Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible but where you have enough room to remove the system components Unpacking the Router m 77 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 78 Unpacking the Router While the chassis is bolted to the pallet you can use a forkl
269. r Supplies on page 86 m Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86 W Removing the SFMs on page 87 W Removing the MCSs on page 88 W Removing the PCGs on page 89 m Removing the Routing Engines on page 90 m Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 91 m Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 92 W Removing the Fan Tray on page 93 W Removing the FPCs on page 94 W Removing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 96 NOTE Do not remove the circuit breaker box or the Connector Interface Panel CIP This chapter does not include instructions for removing these components Removing Components from the Chassis m 85 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Removing the Power Supplies The router has two power supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 A power supply weighs approximately 13 Ib 5 9 kg To remove the power supplies follow this procedure see Figure 32 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Verify that the power switch for each power supply is in the OFF 0 position The switches are on the circuit breaker box Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate using a Phillips screwdriver
270. r box or panel 2 Fan tray FPC with 4 installed PICs 2 Front impeller assembly with craft interface MCS 25 Li Rear lower impeller assembly EE Rear upper impeller assembly Routing Engine 13 3 3 5 4 5 5 5 1 5 5 Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift m 83 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Before installing the chassis perform the following prerequisite procedures Verify that the router site meets the requirements described in Preparing for Router Installation on page 59 Place the rack in its permanent location allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance and secure it to the building structure For details see Rack Requirements on page 59 Read the information in Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 239 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 239 Remove the router from the shipping carton as described in Unpacking the Router on page 77 Then install the router by performing the procedures in the following sections Tools and Parts Required on page 84 Removing Components from the Chassis on page 84 Installing the Chassis into the Rack on page 97 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis on page 99 Tools and Parts Required To install the chassis without using a mechanical lift you need the following tools and parts Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1
271. r routes into the routing table When advertising routes the routing protocols by default advertise only a limited set of routes from the routing table Specifically each routing protocol exports only the active routes that were learned by that protocol Routing Engine Software Components m 47 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide VPNs 48 In addition IGPs IS IS OSPF and RIP export the direct interface routes for the interfaces on which the protocol is explicitly configured For each routing table you can affect the routes that a protocol places into the table and the routes from the table that the protocol advertises by defining one or more routing policies and then applying them to the specific routing protocol Routing policies applied when the routing protocol places routes into the routing table are called import policies because the routes are being imported into the routing table Policies applied when the routing protocol is advertising routes that are in the routing table are called export policies because the routes are being exported from the routing table In other words the terms import and export are used with respect to the routing table Routing policy enables you to control filter which routes are imported into the routing table and which routes are exported from the routing table Routing policy also allows you to set the information associated with a route as it is being imported into or exported from the r
272. ra della porta Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture Advarsel Unng utsettelse for str ling og stirr ikke inn i pninger som er pne fordi usynlig str ling kan emiteres fra portens pning n r det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emiss o de radiac o invisivel atrav s do orif cio da via de acesso quando esta n o tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado dever evitar a exposic o radiac o e n o dever olhar fixamente para orif cios que se encontrarem a descoberto jAtenci n Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiaci n invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiaci n Varning Osynlig str lning kan avges fr n en port ppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du b r d rf r undvika att bli utsatt f r str lning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade ppningar Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings As you maintain the router observe the following guidelines and warnings W Battery Handling Warning on page 248 Safety Guidelines and Warnings MM 247 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide W jewelry Removal Warning on page 249 m Lightning Activity Warning on page 250 W Operating Temperature Warning on page 251 W Product Disposal Warning on page 252 Battery Handling Warning A WARNING Replacing the battery incorrectly might resu
273. re 3 Only one host module is active at a time with the optional second host module in standby mode For more information about host module interdependence and redundancy see Host Module on page 22 The MCS performs the following functions m Monitoring and control of router components The MCS collects statistics from all sensors in the system When it detects a failure or alarm condition it sends a signal to the Routing Engine which generates control messages Host Module m 25 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 26 Host Module or sets an alarm The MCS also relays control messages from the Routing Engine to the router components Controlling component power up and power down The MCS controls the power up sequence of router components as they start and powers down components when their offline buttons are pressed Signaling of mastership In a router with more than one host module the MCS signals to all router components which host module is the master and which is the standby It relays the mastership signal for the two PCGs as well Providing SONET SDH clock source The MCS generates a 19 44 MHz SONET SDH clock signal along with a signal that indicates which MCS is the master SONET SDH clock generator if two MCSs are installed Clock monitoring The MCS monitors the PCG system clock and its SONET SDH clock to verify that they are providing the expected signal It generates an alarm if a clock signal is incorrect
274. rewdriver to tighten the screws 13 Turn on the current from the power source so that voltage flows to the router Figure 105 Connecting Power and Grounding Cables Grounding points To ground Nut zz Flat washer Nut Flat washer Cable lug Terminal studs g Replacing a Fuse To replace a fuse follow this procedure see Figure 106 204 HN Replacing Power System Components Replacing Hardware Components WARNING You must power off the router before removing or installing a fuse 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Remove the rear lower impeller assembly by loosening the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover and sliding the impeller assembly out of the chassis For complete instructions see Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155 3 Determine which fuse has blown The amber LED under the fuse lights and the indicator bulb becomes visible through the clear cover on the fuse 4 Power off the router as described in or Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200 5 Grasp the blown fuse by the edges and rock it in its slot until it comes loose and disconnects Rock up and down for a vertica
275. rface 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 5 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen the captive screw at each corner of the craft interface 96 HW Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the gap around the craft interface and gently pry the impeller assembly forward until you can grasp the sides of the assembly and slide it halfway out of the chassis Place one hand under the assembly to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Figure 42 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly Captive screw Installing the Chassis into the Rack After you have removed components as described in Removing Components from the Chassis on page 84 the chassis is light enough for a team of installers to lift into the rack AN CAUTION The reduced weight of the chassis is approximately 115 Ib 52 kg Installing it into the rack still requires three people to lift and an additional person to secure the mounting screws If you are installing multiple routers in a rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward
276. rip on them Figure 30 shows how to attach the power cables The power cables attach to the 1 4 20 UNC terminal studs located on the circuit breaker box the input set of studs is labeled 48V and the return set is labeled RTN The nuts and locking washers used to secure the power cable lugs on the terminal studs are preinstalled on the studs The tool for loosening or tightening the nuts on the terminal studs is a 7 16 in hexagonal head external drive socket wrench or nut driver with a minimum of 30 Ib in 5 5 Nm tightening torque AN CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications 69 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 30 Power and Grounding Cable Connections Nut Flat washer Nut Cable lug Grounding points i LT To ground Se aa Flat washer Terminal studs g001226 For information about the DC power supply including electrical specifications and a description of components see Power Supply on page 36 For instructions on connecting the DC power and grounding cables during initial installation see Connecting Power to the Router on page 117 For instructions on replacing a DC power cable see Disconnecting and Connecting Power on page 200
277. rmination network Termination network Pin T gu pe SIN RJ 45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port m 269 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide DB 9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE Ports The ports on the CIP labeled AUXILIARY and CONSOLE are DB 9 receptacles that accept RS 232 ElA 232 cable The AUXILIARY port connects the Routing Engine to a laptop modem or other auxiliary unit and the CONSOLE port connects it to a management console The ports are configured as data terminal equipment DTE For more information see Routing Engine Management Ports on page 33 Table 29 describes the DB 9 connector pinouts Table 29 DB 9 Connector Pinout RJ 48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs The El and T1 PICs use an RJ 48 cable which is not supplied with the PIC A CAUTION To maintain agency approvals use only a properly constructed shielded cable Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 and Table 33 describe the RJ 48 connector pinouts Table 30 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 RJ 48 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numbering form 270 NW RJ 48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs Cable Connector Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 RJ 48 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numbering form Table 31 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 RJ 48 Pin PIC Data numbering Data numb
278. rn alle smykker inkludert ringer halskjeder og klokker fer du skal arbeide p utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger Metallgjenstander som er koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svaert varme og kan for rsake alvorlige brannskader eller smelte fast til polene Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente retire todas as j ias que estiver a usar incluindo an is fios e rel gios Os objectos met licos aquecer o em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligac o terra podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais Safety Guidelines and Warnings mm 249 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 250 Atenci n Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a l neas de alimentaci n quitarse las joyas incluidos anillos collares y relojes Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentaci n y a tierra lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos met licos queden soldados a los bornes Varning Tag av alla smycken inklusive ringar halsband och armbandsur innan du arbetar p utrustning som r kopplad till kraftledningar Metallobjekt hettas upp n r de kopplas ihop med str m och jord och kan f rorsaka allvarliga br nnskador metallobjekt kan ocks sammansvetsas med kontakterna Lightning Activity Warning WARNING Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity Waarschuwing
279. ro sn 19 role in forwarding cnc 52 J Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center TAQ ep ester Desc te Ra EN que es 212 Index JUNOS Internet software cliassis DrOCess votada 49 CLI See CLI interface Droeesss tust cs ento EE dee 49 kernel Routing Engine ass aeae e deR 49 management processori i ona iria 49 MIB II PrOCESS catorce 49 modularity and scalability ususe 54 OVEIVIEW a coto lanzada epa I REANA 45 role in system architecture 2 eee 53 routing protocol Drocess 00 cece 44 SNMP Proce SS a moreno om a eU S aS o e Nt 49 tools for accessing and configuring 50 FOTONIN mat rper ter eh eben 50 upgradesof sat teles dice 50 VBNS ceosetase vetas ee eiae btt egets to t dde 48 K kernel software in Routing Engine 49 L laser safety guidelines 0 eee eee 244 LCD on craft interface alarni mode Ae ENEE ei 30 description s de 29 idleumode uie ea er 29 LEDs alarm red and yellow on craft interface descriptions iene erso ve pee ANEN NNN 28 troubleshooting use 208 EPC cati alot anat 51 hosETnodule eiie esed pott RA para PERF ATA 51 MES un ove eder t et eer vidt ys 26 dcc 19 Ree EE EUREN 14 power Supply dl 56 ROUNE ENGINE ice eae ocu copete VS 24 safety Waminsi aa eee eens 244 SEM idas dte at Mae sand Na he 20 lifting handle for jmstallaion ieaie 97 link loss calculating e NENNEN di 75 load sharing power supplies 55 lug
280. roper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 3 Using your thumbs push and hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge of the unit Push the ends of the extractor clips outward to unseat the Routing Engine from the chassis 4 Grasp the extractor clips and slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis AN CAUTION Slide the Routing Engine straight out of the chassis Damage can result if it gets lodged because of uneven movement 5 Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 90 HN Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift If a second Routing Engine is installed repeat the procedure to remove it Figure 36 Removing a Routing Engine 1950 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly The rear upper impeller assembly is located at the top of the chassis rear as shown in Figure 2 The assembly weighs approximately 4 lb 1 8 kg To remove the rear upper impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 37 and Figure 38 which show the two types of impeller that can be installed 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is a
281. rs you might want to seek expert advice Strong sources of electromagnetic interference EMI can destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the router and conduct power surges over the lines into the equipment resulting in an electrical hazard It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and to use electrical surge suppression devices A CAUTION To comply with intrabuilding lightning surge requirements intrabuilding wiring must be shielded and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both ends Router Power Requirements Table 16 lists the power requirements for various hardware components when the router is operating under typical voltage conditions For PIC power requirements see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications 65 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Table 16 Component Power Requirements Component Power Requirement Amps Base system cooling system power supplies and craft 7 10 A 48 V interface Host module Routing Engine and MCS 1 3 A 48 V PCG 0 2 A 48 V SFM 1 3 A 48 V You can use the information in Table 16 and the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide to calculate power consumption for various hardware configurations input current from a different source voltage and thermal output as shown in the following examples For an added safety margin the examples use a generalized value for PICs of 0 625 A 4
282. rs unique to a Routing Engine such as the hostname defined at the edit system hierarchy level and the management interface fxpO or equivalent defined at the edit interfaces hierarchy level To configure Routing Engine specific parameters and still use the same configuration on both Routing Engines include the appropriate configuration statements under the reO and re1 statements at the edit groups hierarchy level and use the apply groups statement For instructions see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Replacing Host Module Components Replacing Hardware Components 6 On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine that is paired with the CB you are removing enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command The command shuts down the Routing Engine cleanly so its state information is preserved user host gt request system halt Cem NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics Command Reference 7 Push the end of each extractor clip located at each end of the MCS outward 8 Grasp the extractor clips and slide the MCS about halfway out of the chassis 9 Place one hand under the MCS to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Figure 81 Remo
283. rt Cable Pinouts Part 5 index Index M 277 278 W Index index Symbols in configuration statements 04 xxi in configuration statements xxi in syntax descriptions isipu iere enan a os XX lt gt in syntax descriptions saisie ees i e ank XX pipe in syntax description XX comments in configuration statements xxi A agency approvals isses 255 air filter cleaning instructions isses 129 description hardware and function 40 installation Instructons sess 129 maintenance ec ave et ade pa SE Fete 128 removal instructiorns rere ees 128 routine inspection of 127 tools TE QUIE EE 139 WEE rides urea lts tae dais youre ces 83 airflow path through chaseis 0 00 0 e cece 40 required clearance around chassis for 62 alarm messages list OF i ceste Errem t 209 relay contacts connecting disconnecting wire 147 descripLiOTt rises cete ste tet teet th e 54 tools TEQUES t s en NR 139 wire specifications 0 60 cece ee eee 74 alarms cutoff lamp test button 00ers 28 handling by Routing Engine esiicesi cra 54 LEDs red and yellow on craft interface 28 mode TOr ECD ot aid 30 altitude acceptable range sss 62 antistatic mat USING e e Y e 226 application specific integrated circuit See ASIC approvals agencn 2 eee cette eee 253 architecture OVE
284. s during initial installation 108 for maintenance or replacement 189 LEDS ld tee tas ees berks 20 MAINTENANCE Abee ini teta Seier 136 Offline DULLOTY 225 see nn eg 20 removal instructions during initial installation 87 for maintenance or replacement 88 serial HUMBET de 262 Stat s checking ct o e tee 56 tools TE QUITO lisa euet rer tta ERR 59 WU 85 SFP installation iNStructions eee 91 termoval instructiorisz sc es oce sea pui aa 90 shipping crate TEPAChI erario qutt came mp ats 265 unpacking the router ooooccccccccccccccccccccin TT show chassis alarms commande 209 show chassis environment mcs command 31 show chassis environment pcg command 35 show chassis environment pem command 37 show chassis fpc commande 16 for FPG status ie xo e ele s 55 show chassis fpc pic status command 54 show chassis hardware commande 255 show chassis routing engine command 31 show chassis sfm commande 36 signal dispersiofta osid acia yace as 71 signaling distance limitations sieercsrrre e 65 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP single mode fiber optic cable See cable fiber optic site electrical wiring specifications 65 environmental specifications 4 62 preparation ENEE 75 INSHEUCUONS aci o utt te Ah ort fie ls 59 routine JnspecLtl
285. s rskilda forsiktighetsatgarder for att forsakra dig om att systemet star stadigt F ljande riktlinjer ges f r att trygga din s kerhet W Juniper Networks router m ste installeras i en st llning som ar f rankrad i byggnadens struktur E Om denna enhet ar den enda enheten pa st llningen skall den installeras l ngst ned p st llningen Om denna enhet installeras p en delvis fylld st llning skall st llningen fyllas nedifr n och upp med de tyngsta enheterna l ngst ned p st llningen W Om st llningen r f rsedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten installeras eller underh lls p st llningen Safety Guidelines and Warnings WN 243 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Ramp Warning WARNING When installing the router do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10 degrees Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden Varoitus Ala k yt sellaista kaltevaa pintaa jonka kaltevuus ylitt 10 astetta Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l inclinaison est sup rieure 10 degr s Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader Aviso N o utilize uma rampa com uma inclina o superior a 10 graus Atenci n No usar una rampa inclinada m s de 10 grados Varning Anv nd inte ramp med en lutning p
286. s Measurement Fans Rear Bottom Blower OK Spinning at normal speed Rear Top Blower OK Spinning at normal speed Front Top Blower OK Spinning at normal speed Fan Tray Rear Left OK Spinning at normal speed Fan Tray Rear Right OK Spinning at normal speed Fan Tray Front Left OK Spinning at normal speed Fan Tray Front Right OK Spinning at normal speed 130 m Maintaining Cooling System Components Maintaining Hardware Components For further description of the output from the command see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Maintaining Host Module Components The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE O and RE 1 and a Miscellaneous Control Subsystem MCS in each of the slots labeled MCS O and MCS 1 at the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 Each paired Routing Engine and MCS function together as a host module To maintain the host module perform the following procedures regularly W Check the LCD and the host module LEDs on the craft interface The LCD reports host module status during normal operation and describes the cause of failures when they occur The green LEDs labeled ONLINE and MASTER light steadily for the master host module when it is functioning normally The ONLINE LED also lights for the standby host module if it is installed For more information about the LEDs and LCD see Craft Interface on page 27 m Issue the C
287. s er jord til jord RTN til RTN 48 V til 48 V Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er 48 V til 48 V RTN til RTN jord til jord Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el extremo del cableado Al conectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado se muele para moler RTN a RTN entonces 48 V a 48 V Al desconectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado es 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN entonces moli para moler Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo Atenci n Wire a fonte de alimentac o de DC Usando os taloes apropriados na extremidade da fiac o Ao conectar a pot ncia a sequ ncia apropriada da fiac o moida para moer RTN a RTN ent o 48 V a 48 V Ao desconectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN moeu ent o para moer Anote que o fio a terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Anote que o fio a terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Varning Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord RTN till RTN 48 V till 48 V Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar 48 V till 48 V RTN till RTN jord till jord DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning WARNING When stranded wiring is required use ap
288. s for ElA 530 PIC m 273 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide GND IB Signal Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect Table 35 DB 25 Connector to DB 15 X 21 Connector Pinout Protective Ground GND Signal Ground Transmit Data Transmit Data Receive Data Receive Data Request To Send Request To Send Data Carrier Detect Data Carrier Detect Receive Clock Receive Clock Fast Ethernet 48 port Cable Pinouts The Fast Ethernet 48 port PIC has four VHDCI connector ports on its faceplate see Figure 121 each of which accepts one of the four RJ 21 cables supplied with the PIC see Figure 122 Each VHDCI connector port supports 12 Ethernet ports 274 g Fast Ethernet 48 port Cable Pinouts Cable Connector Pinouts Figure 121 Fast Ethernet 48 port PIC CEPT 10 100 BASE Tx EE bes EL CETTT PORT 0 11 CD JPonrs 24 35 Q Q2 Ports 3647 Q Q DEE Qe 9 o Y se 83 o B a 93 5 1476 1480 Table 36 describes the RJ 21 cable pinouts eS NOTE RJ 21 pin numbers 25 and 50 do not appear in the table because they are ground connectors Table 36 RJ 21 Pin Assignments Ethernet Port Numbers RJ 21 Pin Assignment Fast Ethernet 48 port Cable Pinouts m 275 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Ethernet Port Numbers RJ 21 Pin Assignment 276 Fast Ethernet 48 po
289. s for grounding cables cece 67 lugs for power and grounding cables 67 maintenance guidelines AUP TUCO e ode a PI Eech og 128 cable PIC ee tela S E rus 154 cooling SVSIEITL da ub qa dr eq rst tton 127 fan tayo so ete eR te e 150 EPG s eov pei tre EAR is ia dude DE 155 host modules scere rer a 151 Index mM 283 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide impeller asserablies 2 big inea beber nds 50 MCS coxa did vut Y EE CERO 51 OVETVIEW pi konpa ata EE EEE EREE E EEES 27 oec LP 55 Pleno al p a Ye ola ves Tii 34 power SUPP Y e e er 37 Routing ENgINe voii cinta tad 31 EN A A A 36 WAININSS EE EE 247 management port Ethernet See Ethernet port process software module of Routing Engine 49 manuals COMMENTS ON ae e EE xxiii MCS COMPONEN Scan catando ts dE 26 description hardware and function 25 installation instructions during initial installation 107 for maintenance or replacement 161 LED Sussie ene LR E bas le 26 MAINTENANCE ue tace Pepe Y vede d 151 offline DUttOTI ae ep e dee n RI RI e trt 26 removal instructions during initial installation 88 for maintenance or replacement 159 Serial MUMDER vy seres rneddeo N 259 status displaying sss 151 tools required e vede e e 139 WII 85 MIB II process software module in Routing Engine 49 midplane description is sce et o gebe eU eco eu 12 power
290. s of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of the GateD software copyright 1991 D L S Associates This product includes software developed by Maker Communications Inc Copyright 1996 1997 Maker Communications Inc uniper Networks the Juniper Networks logo NetScreen NetScreen Technologies the NetScreen logo NetScreen Global Pro ScreenOS and GigaScreen are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries The following are trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc ERX ESP E series Instant Virtual Extranet Internet Processor J2300 J4300 J6300 J Protect series J Web JUNOS JUNOScope JUNOScript JUNOSe M5 M7i M10 M10i M20 M40 M40e M160 M320 M series MMD NetScreen 5GT NetScreen 5XP NetScreen 5XT NetScreen 25 NetScreen 50 NetScreen 204 NetScreen 208 NetScreen 500 NetScreen 5200 NetScreen 5400 NetScreen IDP 10 NetScreen IDP 100 NetScreen IDP 500 NetScreen Remote Security Client NetScreen Remote VPN Client NetScreen SA 1000 Series NetScreen SA 3000 Series NetScreen SA 5000 Series NetScreen SA Central Manager NetScreen Secure Access NetScreen SM 3000 NetScreen Security Manager NMC RX SDX Stateful Signature T320 T640 T series and TX Matrix All other trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners All specifications are subject to change without notice Juni
291. s or transmits data To replace a PIC perform the following procedures m Removing a PIC on page 179 W Installing a PIC on page 181 Removing a PIC To remove a PIC follow this procedure see Figure 92 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the PIC If the PIC connects to fiber optic cable have ready a rubber safety cap for each transceiver and cable 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 5 Ifthe PIC has multiple cable connector ports label the cable connected to each port to make it easier to reconnect the cables correctly Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components m 179 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 180 Use one of the following methods to take the PIC offline W Press and hold the PIC offline button until its failure indicator LED lights which usually takes about 5 seconds The failure LED is usually red for more information see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide For the PICs that install on an FPC1 the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier For the PICs that install on an FPC2 the offline button is on the PIC faceplate See Figure 6 W Issue the following CLI command user host
292. s router dan ook oververhit raakt dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40 C wordt overschreden Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt dient er minstens 15 2 cm speling rond de ventilatie openingen te zijn Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi sit ei saa k ytt tilassa jonka l mp tila ylitt korkeimman suositellun ymp rist l mp tilan 400C Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi tuuletusaukkojen ymp rille on j tett v ainakin 15 2 cm tilaa Attention Pour viter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks router ne l utilisez pas dans une zone o la temp rature ambiante est sup rieure 40 C Pour permettre un flot d air constant d gagez un espace d au moins 15 2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations Warnung Um einen Router der router vor berhitzung zu sch tzen darf dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene Maximum von 40 C berschreitet Um L ftungsverschlu amp zu verhindern achten Sie darauf dab mindestens 15 2 cm lichter Raum um die L ftungs ffnungen herum frei bleibt Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router non adoperateli in un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 409C Per evitare che la circolazione dell aria sia impedita lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15 2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle ventole Advar
293. se si tratta dell unica unit da montare nel supporto W Quando questa unit viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno caricare il supporto dal basso all alto con il componente pi pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto W Se il supporto dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti installare tali dispositivi prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell unit nel supporto Advarsel Unng fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid p denne enheten nar den befinner seg i et kabinett V r n ye med at systemet er stabilt F lgende retningslinjer er gitt for verne om sikkerheten m Juniper Networks router m installeres i et stativ som er forankret til bygningsstrukturen m Denne enheten b r monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i kabinettet m Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt skal kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet W Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr skal stabilisatorene installeres f r montering eller utf ring av reparasjonsarbeid p enheten i kabinettet Safety Guidelines and Warnings Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa estante dever tomar precau es especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um suporte est vel As seguintes directrizes ajud lo o a efect
294. see Figure 33 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Loosen the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab shown in Figure 8 using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary Pull the end of each ejector handle outward until it is nearly perpendicular to the SFM faceplate Grasp the ejector handles and pull firmly to slide the SFM about halfway out of the chassis Place one hand under the SFM to support it slide it completely out of the chassis and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag AN CAUTION When an SFM is out of the chassis do not hold it by the ejector handles They cannot support its weight Do not stack SFMs on top of or under other components Place each one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat stable surface If additional SFMs are installed repeat the procedure to remove them Removing Components from the Chassis m 87 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 33 Removing an SFM Removing the MCSs 88 Locking tab 1931 Ejector handle The router can have an MCS in each of the slots
295. sel Unng overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse skal ikke brukes p steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40 C 1040F S rg for at klaringen rundt lufte pningene er minst 15 2 cm 6 tommer for forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router n o utilize este equipamento numa rea que exceda a temperatura m xima recomendada de 40 C Para evitar a restric o circulac o de ar deixe pelo menos um espa o de 15 2 cm volta das aberturas de ventila o jAtenci n Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router se recaliente no lo haga funcionar en un rea en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente m xima recomendada de 40 C Para impedir la restricci n de la entrada de aire deje un espacio m nimo de 15 2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilaci n Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 251 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 252 Varning F rhindra att en Juniper Networks router verhettas genom att inte anv nda den i ett omr de d r den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen p 40 C verskrids F rhindra att luftcirkulationen inskr nks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme p minst 15 2 cm omkring ventilations ppningarna Product Disposal Warning WARNING Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regu
296. setting routing policies and configuring other software parameters See Routing Policy on page 47 W Multicast routing table cache Stores routing information for all multicast protocols running on the router including DVMRP and PIM You can configure additional routes for inclusion in the routing table In the multicast routing table the routing protocol process uses traffic flow and other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol algorithms to select active routes m MPLS routing table Stores MPLS label information For unicast routes the routing protocol process determines active routes by choosing the most preferred route which is the route with the lowest preference value By default the route s preference value is simply a function of how the routing protocol process learned about the route You can modify the default preference value using routing policy and with software configuration parameters For multicast traffic the routing protocol process determines active routes based on traffic flow and other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol algorithms The routing protocol process then installs one or more active routes to each network destination into the Routing Engine s forwarding table You can configure additional routing tables to meet your requirements as described in the JUNOS Routing Protocols Configuration Guide Routing Policy By default all routing protocols place thei
297. slots and be fully operational for the host module to function For more information see Host Module on page 22 m PCG The router has two PCGs Both PCGs send their clock signals to the other Packet Forwarding Engine components along with a signal that indicates which clock is the master If one PCG fails the other PCG becomes the master system clock For more information see Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators PCGs on page 18 m Power supply The router has two load sharing fully redundant power supplies to distribute DC power to the other components If one power supply fails the second power supply can provide full power to the router s components indefinitely For more information see Power System on page 35 m SFM The router can have up to four interconnected SFMs If one SFM fails the switching and forwarding functions of the failed module are distributed among the remaining SFMs Total bandwidth is reduced by 1 n where n is the total number of SFMs installed in the router For example in a system with four SFMs each SFM provides one fourth of the forwarding capacity For more information see Switching and Forwarding Module SFM on page 19 In the base configuration the router has one host module and multiple SFMs PCGs power supplies and cooling system components Safety Requirements Warnings and Guidelines To avoid harm to yourself or the router as you install and maintain it you need to
298. staller les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de r parer l unit en casier Warnung Zur Vermeidung von K rperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell m ssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 241 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 242 sicherzustellen da amp das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gew hrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen W Der Juniper Networks router mu in einem Gestell installiert werden das in der Geb udestruktur verankert ist W Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden W Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gef llten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist W Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubeh r geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa unit in un supporto occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la Sicurezza personale m Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio il quale deve essere fissato alla struttura dell edificio W Questa unit deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto
299. ster Routing Engine also determines which of the two PCGs is the master The Routing Engine is hot pluggable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 For information about the effect of removing a Routing Engine see Host Module on page 22 For replacement instructions see Replacing a Routing Engine on page 165 Routing Engine Components The Routing Engine shown in Figure 9 is a two board system with the following components m CPU Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router s routing tables and routing protocols It has a Pentium class processor W SDRAM Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes m Compact flash drive Provides primary storage for software images configuration files and microcode The drive is fixed and inaccessible from outside the router W Hard disk Provides secondary storage for log files memory dumps and rebooting the system if the flash drive fails W PC card slots Accept removable PC cards which store software images for system upgrades m LED Indicates disk activity for the internal IDE interface It does not necessarily indicate routing related activity W Interfaces for out of band management access Provide information about Routing Engine status to devices console laptop or terminal server that can be attached to access ports located on the Connector Interface Panel CIP E EEPROM St
300. stitutes oversubscription The router architecture cleanly separates control operations from packet forwarding operations which helps to eliminate processing and traffic bottlenecks Control operations in the router are performed by the Routing Engine which runs JUNOS Internet software to handle routing protocols traffic engineering policy policing monitoring and configuration management Forwarding operations in the router are performed by the Packet Forwarding Engine which consists of hardware including ASICs designed by Juniper Networks System Description mM 3 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Field Replaceable Units FRUs Field replaceable units FRUs are router components that can be replaced at the customer site Replacing most FRUs requires minimal router downtime The router uses the following types of FRUs W Hot removable and hot insertable FRUs You can remove and replace these components without powering down the router or disrupting the routing functions m Hot pluggable FRUs You can remove and replace these components without powering down the router but the routing functions of the system are interrupted when the component is removed Table 4 lists the FRUs for the M160 router Table 4 Field Replaceable Units Hot Removable and FRUs That Require Powering Hot Insertable FRUs Hot Pluggable FRUs Down the Router Air filter Miscellaneous Control Circuit breaker box Subsystem MCS Fan tray loc
301. t in the canal of the transceiver or cable connector could cause loss of light reducing signal power and possibly causing intermittent problems with the optical connection To clean the transceivers use an appropriate fiber cleaning device such as RIFOCS Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands part number 946 Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you use After you have cleaned the transceiver on the fiber optic PIC make sure that the connector tip of the fiber optic cable is clean Use only an approved alcohol free fiber optic cable cleaning kit such as the Opptex Cletop S Fiber Cleaner Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you use The router has two Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators PCGs installed in the slots labeled PCG O and PCG 1 on the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 3 To maintain the PCGs perform the following procedures regularly Check the LEDs on the PCG faceplates The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when the PCG is functioning normally The blue LED labeled MASTER lights steadily on the master PCG For more information see PCG Components on page 19 Issue the CLI show chassis environment pcg command to check the status of the PCGs As shown in the sample output the master PCG is designated Online Master clock and the standby PCG Online Standby user host gt show chassis environment pcg PCG 0 status Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components m 135 M160 Internet R
302. te dut wees 128 Cleaning the Air Filter orto ore ier RO RA vlr 129 Installing the AIr Ellter eurn pt m vt oe bte I e ERES dde os 129 Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers sss 150 Maintaining Host Module Components 0 cece cece eee ee eens 131 Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components 132 M tntaining EPOS cobi ue eem Eech EN bout hse 155 Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables cnn 154 Maintaining the PCS rte erste t teda de UT e aq uel re gud 155 Maintaining SEMS occ cobre a Moone cp nae eek es 136 Maintaining Power Supplies ii daa Ebo 137 Chapter 11 Replacing Hardware Components 139 Tools and Parts Required cd eo tank en eese s D EET t edid 159 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables 141 Removing the CIR pao etes vers ep iae Prados qua Gg s rre ds 141 Installing te CIP es weet giis d e etcetera pedet e P ilg 145 Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports 145 Replacing the Management Ethernet Cape 146 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable 0000 146 Replace Alarm Relay WIES seb sexe bee s eon taret bises 147 Replacing Cooling System Components 00 cece eee ee ees 148 Replacing bread Se EA Ubilla de eua 148 viii B Table of Contents Table of Contents Removing the Fan Tray aa e e ed A 148 Installing the Fan Tray sciet ir ennt bete tete ene td Ree 149 Replacing the Front Impeller Assem
303. ted and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense 254 NW Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Cont B ontacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware This chapter describes how to return the router or individual components to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement W Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 255 W Contacting Customer Support on page 262 m Return Procedure on page 263 m Tools and Parts Required on page 264 W Packing the Routing Node for Shipment on page 265 W Packing Components for Shipment on page 267 Locating Component Serial Numbers Before contacting Juniper Networks Inc to request a Return Materials Authorization RMA you must find the serial number on the router or component To list all of the router components and their serial numbers enter the following command line interface CLI command user host
304. tely 20 U A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association You can stack eight M160 routers in a rack that has at least 40 U 70 in or 1 78 m of usable vertical space The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured router up to about 370 5 Ib 168 kg If you stack eight routers in one rack it must be capable of supporting about 740 lb 336 kg Rack Requirements Preparing for Router Installation Figure 26 Typical Center Mount Rack Mounting rails ft 3m uN Floor bolts 1011 Spacing of Mounting Holes Table 14 specifies the spacing between mounting holes in the chassis s front support posts and center mounting brackets The mounting holes in a front mount rack s rails must align with the holes in the front support posts and the mounting holes ina center mount rack s rails must align with the holes in the center mounting brackets Table 14 Spacing of Holes on Front Support Post and Center Mounting Bracket Router Mounting Rail Hole Spacing Front support post 4U 7 in or 17 78 cm Center mounting bracket 3 U 5 25 in or 13 33 cm Rack Requirements m 61 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Connection to Building Structure Always secure the rack to the structure of the building If your geographical area is subject
305. tent permitted by law uniper shall not be liable for any liability for lost profits loss of data or costs or procurement of substitute goods or services or for any special indirect or consequential damages arising out of this Agreement the Software or any Juniper or Juniper supplied software In no event shall Juniper be liable for damages arising from unauthorized or improper use of any Juniper or Juniper supplied software EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN OR IN SEPARATE DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED FROM JUNIPER AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE NCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK 9 Termination Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license granted herein Upon such termination Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer s possession or control 10 Taxes All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes withholdings duties or levies collectively Taxes Customer shall be responsible for payi
306. ter Hardware Guide 124 HN Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software Part 3 Hardware Maintenance Replacement and Troubleshooting Procedures m Maintaining Hardware Components on page 127 W Replacing Hardware Components on page 159 W Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 207 Hardware Maintenance Replacement and Troubleshooting Procedures 125 126 Hardware Maintenance Replacement and Troubleshooting Procedures Chapter 10 Maintaining Hardware Components This chapter describes how to maintain hardware components installed in the router Some components such as the Connector Interface Panel CIP require no maintenance For information about returning a part to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255 W Routine Maintenance Procedures on page 127 H Maintaining Cooling System Components on page 127 H Maintaining Host Module Components on page 131 m Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 132 m Maintaining Power Supplies on page 137 Routine Maintenance Procedures For optimum router performance perform the following preventive maintenance procedures regularly Inspect the installation site for moisture loose wires or cables and excessive dust Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the router and into the air intake vents Check the status reporting devices on the craft interface system alarms LEDs and LC
307. the guides at the top and bottom of the CIP slot which is located to the left of the FPC card cage gt NOTE The components on the CIP are on the left side of the board unlike the components of an FPC which are on the right side Verify that the components are on the left before inserting the CIP 3 Slide the CIP into the chassis until it contacts the midplane Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables m 143 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide AN CAUTION Be sure to slide the CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the connector pins on the front of the midplane 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver tighten the screw at each end of the CIP faceplate 5 Reattach an external management device to one of the Routing Engine ports on the CIP AUXILIARY CONSOLE or ETHERNET Also reattach alarm relay contacts if desired For instructions see Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 146 Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 146 and Replace Alarm Relay Wires on page 147 6 Power on the router and verify correct startup by performing the procedures in Powering On the Router on page 119 Figure 65 Installing the CIP Ss eo To EI e a 23 e 1259 144 1H Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables
308. the impeller cover and slide the assembly out of the chassis Figure 39 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly 1914 Removing the Fan Tray The fan tray is located behind the cable management system on the front of the chassis just above the air filter as shown in Figure 1 The fan tray contains four fans and weighs approximately 13 lb 5 9 kg To remove the fan tray follow this procedure see Figure 40 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the fan tray using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 3 Grasp the sides of the fan tray and pull firmly to slide it out of the chassis Removing Components from the Chassis WN 93 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 40 Removing the Fan Tray E s 1936 9 Removing the FPCs The router can have up to eight FPCs mounted vertically in the FPC card cage on the front of the chassis as shown in Figure 1 An FPC that houses four PICs weighs about 15 lb 6 8 kg Cem NOTE To help you work systematically the following procedure directs you to remove FPCs starting at the left side of the card cage and working toward the right
309. the maximum allowed its effect can be considered as a power penalty in the power budget The optical power budget must allow for the sum of component attenuation power penalties including those from dispersion and a safety margin for unexpected losses For more information about power budget see Calculating Power Budget for Fiber Optic Cable on page 72 Calculating Power Budget for Fiber Optic Cable 72 To ensure that fiber optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation you need to calculate the link s power budget which is the maximum amount of power it can transmit When you calculate the power budget you use a worst case analysis to provide a margin of error even though all the parts of an actual system do not operate at the worst case levels To calculate the worst case estimate of power budget Pg you assume minimum transmitter power Pr and minimum receiver sensitivity Pp Pg Pr PR The following hypothetical power budget equation uses values measured in decibels dB and decibels referred to one milliwatt dBm Pg PT Pr Pg 15 dBm 28 dBm 13 dB 0 D l Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines Preparing for Router Installation Calculating Power Margin for Fiber Optic Cable After calculating a link s power budget using the equation described in Calculating Power Budget for Fiber Optic Cable on page 72 you can calculate the power margin Py which repres
310. thease ote 67 grounding cables JEE S E EE E EE 67 guidelines See specifications H hardware components EP E E E EET 16 hostmodules cec eua ede eet e ena 22 Le 26 MUG Plane 45 qus apa 12 EE 7 Pratt tt 19 PS e ESSERE SS es 14 power requirements tias seed ep ede pan giel 65 reinstallation of all during initial installation 99 removal of all during initial installation 84 returning for repair or replacement 255 Ro ting ENBINE ger eser needs ett nt EE g ie een 24 SEMEN yt vbt tst ho 20 WEIS Es cuss ck cadens tug teda EAT OSEE INN A Pu a 85 higher order mode loss OO 71 host mod l cisne EPPEP SOR s 22 description hardware and function 22 LEDS c6 et ld a lia 51 INGINCEN ANCE Hh sa eege tence stp rub eT Biet 131 mastership checking and switching 22 282 HN index See also MCS Routing Engine hot pluggable components See field replaceable units hot removable and hot insertable components See field replaceable units humidity relative acceptable ooo 62 l I O Manager ASIC OI EP dece stie dot els enh E 16 role in forwarding er NENNT 52 imrmunity staridards dictadas 255 impeller assembly See front impeller assembly rear lower impeller assembly rear upper impeller assembly installation instructions SERIES et e E ERE 129 alarm relay contact wires during initial installation sssuue 115 for maintenance or replacem
311. this procedure see Figure 47 102 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Grasp the sides of the fan tray and align the rear of the tray with the guides inside the chassis Slide the fan tray all the way into the chassis Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the cable management system Figure 47 Reinstalling the Fan Tray 1937 o o Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly The rear lower impeller assembly is located to the left of the circuit breaker box on the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 To reinstall it follow this procedure see Figure 48 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Orient the impeller so that the label is on the top Align the rails on the upper edges of the impeller assembly with the guides inside the chassis Push the impeller assembly up and to the right t
312. tions W Replacing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 195 W Replacing a Power Supply on page 197 W Disconnecting and Connecting Power on page 200 W Replacing a Fuse on page 204 Replacing the Circuit Breaker Box The circuit breaker box is field replaceable but you must power off the router before removing or replacing it To replace the circuit breaker box perform the following procedures m Removing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 195 m Installing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 195 Removing the Circuit Breaker Box The circuit breaker box is located on the rear of the chassis above the right power supply as shown in Figure 2 It weighs about 6 Ib 2 7 kg AN CAUTION Do not remove the grounding lug from the grounding points on the chassis during this procedure To remove the circuit breaker box follow this procedure see Figure 99 Replacing Power System Components m 193 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 194 On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software If two Routing Engines are installed also issue the command on the backup Routing Engine user host gt request system halt NOTE Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the JUNOS Protocols Class of Service and System Basics
313. to earthquakes bolt the rack to the floor For maximum stability also secure the rack to ceiling brackets For more information see Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 240 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance When planning the installation site you need to allow sufficient clearance around the rack see Figure 27 W For the cooling system to function properly the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted Figure 20 depicts the airflow in the router W For service personnel to remove and install hardware components there must be adequate space at the front and back of the router Allow at least 24 in 61 cm both in front of the router and behind it Figure 27 Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements Top down view 24 in 61 cm clearance for maintenance a p og c 24 in 61 cm clearance in 6 in 15 2 cm clearance for maintenance c 73 6 Cm er for airflow A Front of chassis 19 in 19 in 17 5 in Rear of chassis 48 3 cm 48 3 cm 44 5 cm VO Y i 6 in 15 2 cm clearance Center rack mount ears for airflow 1169 Routing Node Environmental Specifications Table 15 specifies the environmental specifications required for normal router operation In addition the site should be as dust free as possible Dust can clog air intake vents reducing cooling system efficiency Check the vents freque
314. to the CONSOLE port on the CIP or over a telnet connection to a network connected to the ETHERNET port on the CIP Gather the following information before configuring the router W Name the router will use on the network W Domain name the router will use W IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface m IP address of a default router m IP address of a DNS server W X Password for the root user To configure the software follow this procedure 1 If the router is not already turned on power it on as described in Powering On the Router on page 119 2 Login as the root user There is no password 5 Start the CLI root cli root gt 4 Enter configuration mode cli gt configure edit root 5 Configure the name of the router If the name includes spaces enclose the name in quotation marks edit root set system host name host name Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software m 121 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Configure the router s domain name edit root set system domain name domain name Configure the IP address and prefix length for the router s Ethernet interface edit root set interfaces fxpO unit O family inet address address prefix length Configure the IP address of a backup router which is used only while the routing protocol is not running edit root set system backup router address Configure the IP address of a DNS server
315. ts on page 139 For instructions about returning a faulty component to Juniper Networks see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255 Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components The following sections describe how to troubleshoot FPCs and PICs Troubleshooting FPCs on page 214 Troubleshooting PICs on page 215 Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components NM 213 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Troubleshooting FPCs 214 As soon as an FPC is seated in an operating router the Routing Engine downloads the FPC software to it The FPC then runs diagnostics and enables the PICs housed on it During this time the green LED labeled OK above the FPC on the craft interface blinks When the FPC is online and functioning normally the OK LED lights steadily To troubleshoot the FPCs follow these guidelines m If the red LED labeled FAIL above the FPC on the craft interface lights steadily check the LCD on the craft interface for a message about the status of the FPC and the PICs housed in it m Make sure the FPC is properly seated in the midplane use a Phillips screwdriver to check that the screws at the top and bottom of the card carrier are tight W To check the status of an FPC issue the following CLI command user host gt show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online 37 4 0 32 1 39 1 Online 3
316. ts on the chassis Make sure the router Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components m 191 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 192 is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Verify that a rubber safety cap covers the SFP transceiver installing one if necessary 3 Orient the SFP over the port in the PIC such that the connector end will enter the slot first and the SFP connector faces the appropriate direction W Ifthe PIC has ten SFP ports the ports are arranged in two columns The SFP connector faces to the right for ports in the left column and to the left for ports in the right column W Ifthe PIC has one or two SFP ports the SFP connector faces to the left on platforms in which FPCs install vertically in the chassis and faces upward on platforms in which FPCs install horizontally in the chassis 4 Slide the SFP into the slot If there is resistance remove the SFP and try flipping it so that the connector faces the other direction 5 Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable and insert the cable into the transceiver A WARNING Do not look directly into the ends of fiber optic cables or into the transceivers on the interface faceplate Single mode fiber optic cable and the interfaces that use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes A CA
317. ts other than PICs plug directly into the midplane The midplane contains an EEPROM that stores the serial number and revision level of the midplane The midplane performs the following functions W Transfer of packets The midplane accepts an incoming packet after it is processed by an FPC and transmits it to an SFM The SFM performs switching and forwarding functions and transfers outgoing packets back across the midplane to the FPCs for transmission to the network W Power distribution The midplane distributes power to all router components from the power supplies attached to it m Signal connectivity The midplane transports the signals exchanged by system components for monitoring and control purposes 12 Mm Packet Forwarding Engine Figure 4 Midplane Midplane T Hardware Component Overview FPC 1171 Physical Interface Cards PICs Physical Interface Cards PICs physically connect the router to network media They are housed in Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs for more information about FPCs see Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs on page 14 Quad wide PICs such as the OC 192 STM 64 SONET SDH PIC are exceptions Such PICs occupy an entire FPC slot in the chassis and insert directly into the slot rather than into an FPC card carrier PICs receive incoming packets from the ne
318. ttach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router Maintaining Cooling System Components m 129 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Grasp the sides of the air filter and push it firmly into place over the air intake vent 3 Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the air filter cover Figure 63 Installing the Air Filter Air filter cover 1218 Air filter Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers The fan tray is attached to the back of the cable management system and installs into the front of the chassis as shown in Figure 1 There are also three separate non interchangeable impeller assemblies The front impeller is located behind the craft interface shown in Figure 1 and works together with the fan tray to cool the FPCs and midplane The upper and lower impellers on the rear of the chassis shown in Figure 2 work together to cool the components that install into the rear of the chassis To check the status of the impellers and the fans in the fan tray issue the show chassis environment command The output includes an entry for each impeller which it refers to as a Blower and for each fan in the fan tray user host gt show chassis environment Class Item Statu
319. ttached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 3 Grasp the screws at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the assembly out of the chassis Removing Components from the Chassis m 91 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 37 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly 290 46 Vier 28500098080900 20508508000080 28008003080089 A 1211 1933 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly The rear lower impeller assembly is located to the left of the circuit breaker box on the rear of the chassis as shown in Figure 2 The assembly weighs approximately 5 lb 2 3 kg To remove the rear lower impeller assembly follow this procedure see Figure 39 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 2 Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary 92 HN Removing Components from the Chassis Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift 3 Grasp the screws at opposite corners of
320. tware configuration guides This chapter discusses the following topics W Routing Engine Software Components on page 45 W Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software on page 50 W Tools for Monitoring the Software on page 50 W Software Upgrades on page 50 Routing Engine Software Components The Routing Engine software consists of several software processes that control router functions and a kernel that coordinates communication among the processes as described in the following sections W Routing Protocol Process on page 44 Routing Engine Software Components m 43 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide m VPNs on page 48 m Interface Process on page 49 m Chassis Process on page 49 W SNMP and MIB II Processes on page 49 W Management Process on page 49 m Routing Engine Kernel on page 49 Routing Protocol Process 44 The JUNOS software routing protocol process controls the routing protocols that run on the router The routing protocol process starts all configured routing protocols and handles all routing messages It consolidates the routing information learned from all routing protocols into common routing tables From this routing information the routing protocol process determines the active routes to network destinations and installs these routes into the Routing Engine s forwarding table Finally the routing protocol process implements the routing policies you specify which determine how routing information
321. twork and transmit outgoing packets to the network performing framing and line speed signaling for their media type as required PICs also encapsulate outgoing packets received from the FPCs before transmitting them The controller ASIC on each PIC performs additional control functions specific to the PIC media type The router supports various PICs including ATM Channelized Gigabit Ethernet IP Services and SONET SDH interfaces For complete PIC specifications see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide Packet Forwarding Engine m 13 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Some PICs such as selected Gigabit Ethernet PICs accept small form factor pluggables SFPs which are fiber optic transceivers that can be removed from the PIC Various SFPs have different reach characteristics You can mix them in a single PIC and change the combination dynamically SFPs are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 For SFP replacement instructions see Replace an SFP on page 190 For information about PICs that use SFPs see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide You can install up to four PICs in an FPC The number of ports on a PIC depends on the type of PIC PICs are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 For PIC replacement instructions see Replacing a PIC on page 179 PIC Components Most PICs supported on the M160 router have the fol
322. tworks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Products made or sold by Juniper Networks including the ERX 510 ERX 705 ERX 710 ERX 1410 ERX 1440 M5 M7i M10 M10i M20 M40 M40e M160 M320 and T320 routers T640 routing node and the JUNOS and SDX 300 software or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks U S Patent Nos 5 473 599 5 905 725 5 909 440 6 192 051 6 333 650 6 359 479 6 406 312 6 429 706 6 459 579 6 493 347 6 538 518 6 538 899 6 552 918 6 567 902 6 578 186 and 6 590 785 YEAR 2000 NOTICE Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant The JUNOS software has no known time related limitations through the year 2038 However the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036 End User License Agreement READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN YOU AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER AS A REPRESENTATIVE AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN THEN A DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND B YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING
323. u kontrollera att str mf rs rjningen till likstr mskretsen ar bruten Kontrollera att all str mf rs rjning r BRUTEN genom att sla AV det versp nningsskydd som skyddar likstr mskretsen och tejpa fast versp nningsskyddets omkopplare i FR N l get DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit The grounding conductor is a separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set For further information see Power Connection and Cable Specifications on page 67 WARNING When installing the router the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdist minen aina tehtava ensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi Attention Lors de l installation de l appareil la mise la terre doit toujours tre connect e en premier et d connect e en dernier Warnung Der Erdanschluf mu bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell unit eseguire sempre per primo il colleg
324. uar o seu trabalho com seguranca W O Juniper Networks router dever ser instalado numa prateleira fixa a estrutura do edificio m Esta unidade dever ser montada na parte inferior da estante caso seja esta a nica unidade a ser montada m Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada coloque os itens mais pesados na parte inferior da estante arrumando os de baixo para cima W Seaestante possuir um dispositivo de estabiliza o instale o antes de montar ou reparar a unidade Atenci n Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable Para garantizar su seguridad proceda seg n las siguientes instrucciones m EI Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del edificio W Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor cuando sea la nica unidad en el mismo m Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado comenzar la instalaci n desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo m s pesado en la parte inferior W Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores instalar stos antes de montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor Varning F r att undvika kroppsskada n r du installerar eller utf r underh llsarbete pa denna enhet p en st llning m ste du vidta
325. udes the following functions and features Processing of routing protocol packets The Routing Engine handles all packets that concern routing protocols freeing the Packet Forwarding Engine to handle only packets that represent Internet traffic Software modularity Because each software process is devoted to a different function and uses a separate process space the failure of one process has little or no effect on the others In depth Internet functionality Each routing protocol is implemented with a complete set of Internet features and provides full flexibility for advertising filtering and modifying routes Routing policies are set according to route parameters for example prefix prefix lengths and Border Gateway Protocol BGP attributes Scalability The JUNOS routing tables have been designed to hold all the routes in current networks with ample capacity for expansion Additionally the Routing Engine Architecture System Architecture Overview JUNOS Internet software can efficiently support large numbers of interfaces and virtual circuits m Management interface Different levels of system management tools are provided including the JUNOS command line interface CLI the JUNOScript application programming interface the craft interface and SNMP W Storage and change management Configuration files system images and microcode can be held and maintained in primary and secondary storage systems permitting loca
326. uide Excessive system temperature is almost always caused by excessive environmental temperature Correct the environmental temperature before powering on the router All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct 216 If either of the following conditions applies perform the diagnostic procedure described following the list of conditions W The LEDs on one power supply are all off but the LEDs on the other supply indicate that it is functioning properly m The LED states on one or both supplies indicate a problem On the enhanced power supply the green LED labeled CB ON is not lit and the amber LED labeled CB OFF is lit or the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK is blinking or is not lit On the original power supply the green LED labeled CB ON is not lit and the amber LED labeled CB OFF is lit or the amber LED labeled NO AIRFLOW is lit or the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK is blinking or is not lit Perform the following steps to diagnose and correct the problem 1 Check the red alarm LED on the craft interface W if it is lit read the message on the craft interface LCD The display reports the number of alarm conditions and the source of each alarm as described in LCD Alarm Mode on page 30 For a list of messages see Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209 Issue the following CLI command for more information about the cause of an alarm condition user host gt show chassis alarms og NOT
327. uments documents accompanying the product the Software user manual s Juniper s website for the Software or messages displayed by the Software may specify limits to Customer s use of the Software Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats concurrent users sessions subscribers nodes or transactions or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features functionalities or capabilities or provide temporal or geographical limits Customer s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable license s for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller 4 Use Prohibitions Notwithstanding the foregoing the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to and Customer agrees not to and shall not a modify unbundle reverse engineer or create derivative works based on the Software b make unauthorized copies of the Software except as necessary for backup purposes c rent transfer or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software in any form to any third party d remove any proprietary notices labels or marks on or in any copy of the Software e distribute any copy of the Software to any third party including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand
328. upport posts and center mounting brackets one on each side extend the chassis width to 19 in 48 3 cm and enable installation into either a front mount or a center mount rack Figure 1 Figure 2 and Figure 3 show three views of the router chassis Chassis 7 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 1 Front of Chassis Craft interface FPCs ena H EA Cable management system Air filter 1165 8 W Chassis Hardware Component Overview Figure 2 Rear of Chassis with Component Cover in Place s _ Upper impeller s NR Grounding iuit 9 points impeller Circuit breaker box Power supplies Chassis WM 9 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Figure 3 Rear of Chassis with Component Cover Removed SFMs MCS 0 Routing Engines MCS 1 SFMs 1166 The chassis includes the following electrical safety components m Two electrostatic discharge ESD points banana plug receptacles one front and one rear as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 W Two internally threaded grounding points as shown in Figure 2 A WARNING Before removing or installing components of a functioning router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your
329. ur equipment in the event of a fire emergency Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire safety and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your equipment In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire you should first turn power off to the equipment at the source Then use a Type C fire extinguisher which uses noncorrosive fire retardants to extinguish the fire For more information about fire extinguishers see Fire Suppression Equipment on page 64 Fire Safety Requirements m 63 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Fire Suppression Equipment Power Guidelines 64 Type C fire extinguishers which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide CO and Halotron are most effective for suppressing electrical fires Type C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers dry chemical fire extinguishers near Juniper Networks equipment The primary ingredient in
330. ure includes the following components Midplane Transports packets notifications and other signals between the FPCs and the Packet Forwarding Engine as well as other system components Physical Interface Card PIC Physically connects the router to fiber optic or digital network media A controller ASIC in each PIC performs control functions specific to the PIC media type Flexible PIC Concentrator FPC Houses PICs and provides shared memory for processing incoming and outgoing packets Each FPC hosts four I O Manager ASICs which divide incoming data packets into memory blocks cells before passing them to the SFMs and reassembles cells into data packets when the packets are ready for transmission The FPC also hosts two Packet Director ASICs one distributes incoming packets among the I O Manager ASICs and the other distributes outgoing packets to the appropriate PICs on the FPC Switching and Forwarding Module SFM Hosts an Internet Processor II ASIC which makes forwarding decisions and two Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs one distributes data cells to the shared memory buffers on the FPCs and the other notifies the FPCs of forwarding decisions for outgoing packets Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine 52 Use of ASICs promotes efficient movement of data packets through the system Packets flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine in the following sequence see Figure 23 1 2 Packets arrive at an
331. ures See Instruction 65 R rack clearance around required sisisers re 62 mounting hole spachng eee 61 Gehlen UL EE 62 size and strength required 0 0005 60 standards EIA and ETS 60 radio frequency interference preventing 65 rear component cover installation InstructHons 0 0 2 ee 109 removal Instructions eese peppers 86 rear lower impeller assembly installation instructions during initial installation su 105 for maintenance or replacement 155 EILER kk Bee 130 removal instructions during initial installation 0 92 for maintenance or replacement 155 tools Teq ited aces aia 159 troubleshootng esses ey ce PR eR xd a 212 Weight 422 13d Qesttereere EST ERU Ne 85 rear upper impeller assembly installation instructions during initial installation ssu 104 for maintenance or replacement 158 maintenafice iia esee rial i adt 150 removal instructions during initial installation 91 for maintenance or replacement 157 tools requited zt e ters epe eda 159 troubleshooting suse e incas 212 WISE sai tauanud reet EE 83 redundancy COLAPON EN Srila nyt 4 COOLING SVSECI rt 39 POWE SYSTEM iius ie aed ves vets iaa dae 35 regulatory compliance sess 221 relative humidity acceptable siueiiesrerr rne 62 removal instructions artilleria Ee A EE
332. use it such as ATM and SONET SDH interfaces emit laser light that can damage your eyes CAUTION Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing cable The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 3 Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate 4 Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components Replacing Hardware Components AN CAUTION Do not let fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle which stresses the cable at the fastening point 5 Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port 6 Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables 7 If the PIC is offline its failure indicator LED is lit use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online W Press and hold the PIC offline button until the status LED
333. user host gt show chassis environment mcs MCS 0 status State Temperature Power 33M 5 0 V 12 0 M 5 0 V bias 8 0 V bias BUS Revision FPGA Revision MCS 1 status State Temperature Power 34 3V 940 V 12 0 V 5 0 V bias 8 0 V bias BUS Revision FPGA Revision Online Master 48 degrees C 118 degrees F 3299 mV 4971 mV 11770 mV 4989 mV 8246 mV 12 T3 Online Standby 51 degrees C 123 degrees F 3316 mV 5001 mV 11775 mV 5001 mV 8249 mV 12 13 For further description of the output from the commands see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference Protocols Class of Service Chassis and Management Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components For instructions on maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine components see the following sections W Maintaining FPCs on page 133 m Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 154 m Maintaining the PCGs on page 155 132 Mm Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components Maintaining FPCs Maintaining Hardware Components Maintaining SFMs on page 136 The router can have up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators FPCs mounted vertically in the FPC card cage at the front of the chassis as shown in Figure 1 To maintain FPCs perform the following procedures regularly Check the LCD on the craft interface and the LEDs on the craft interface directly above each FPC slot The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when an FPC is functi
334. uting information and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies A Layer 3 VPN is aware of routes within a customer s network requiring more configuration on the part of the service provider than a Layer 2 VPN The sites that make up a Layer 3 VPN are connected over a service provider s existing public Internet backbone W Interprovider VPNs An interprovider VPN supplies connectivity between two VPNs in separate autonomous systems ASs This functionality could be used Routing Engine Software Components Interface Process Chassis Process JUNOS Internet Software Overview by a VPN customer with connections to several various ISPs or different connections to the same ISP in various geographic regions W Carrier of Carrier VPNs Carrier of carrier VPNs allow a VPN service provider to supply VPN service to a customer who is also a service provider The latter service provider supplies Internet or VPN service to an end customer The JUNOS interface process manages the physical interface devices and logical interfaces on the router It implements the JUNOS command line interface CLI commands and configuration statements that you use to specify interface properties such as location FPC location in the FPC card cage and PIC location on an FPC the interface type such as SONET SDH or ATM encapsulation and interface specific properties You can configure both interfaces that are currently active and interfaces
335. uting protocols are fully interoperable with existing IP routing protocols and provide the scale and control necessary for the Internet core The software provides support for the following unicast routing protocols BGP Border Gateway Protocol version 4 is an EGP that guarantees loop free exchange of routing information between routing domains also called autonomous systems BGP in conjunction with JUNOS routing policy provides a system of administrative checks and balances that can be used to implement peering and transit agreements ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method that hosts can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet IS IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System is a link state interior gateway protocol IGP for IP networks that uses the shortest path first algorithm SPF algorithm also called the Dijkstra algorithm to determine routes OSPF Open Shortest Path First version 3 OSPFv3 supports version 6 of the Internet Protocol IPv6 The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF such as flooding Designated Router DR election area based topologies and the Shortest Path First SPF calculations remain unchanged Some differences exist either due to changes in protocol semantics between IPv4 and IPv6 or to handle the increased address size of IPv6 RIP Routing Information Protocol version 2 is an IGP for IP networks based on the Bellman Ford algorithm RIP is a
336. vent Saturation at SONET SDH Pics 74 Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications 74 Site Preparation Checklist uae ees Pd e 75 Unpacking the Router 77 Jools and Parts Required s o oe eae Ae bee atts a e ess 77 Unipacking the Routers ce ceu A A Sa 77 Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift 81 Jools and Parts Requifed us ees e dl tada ect dd 81 Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical unt 81 Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift 83 To9ls anid Parts Required fe Pie add Coates etbbnide 84 Removing Components from the Chassis 84 Removing the Power Supplies ege DE nas hiss setae tne da 86 Removing the Rear Component Cover 86 REMOVING thessEMS ek Ad dad fos bL hr e ia tle NU da does 87 Removing the MOSS ene TA Aa ts 88 REMOVING the POS ntsc pisas rocas 89 Removing the Routing Engines oocccccccccccococcnnnnnnnn e ees 90 Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly usisssrerrerrerrrre 91 Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly siicrii rriren 92 Removing the Fan Maye cuestas rento tetona A ERIS nada eescht 93 Removing the EPGS ecce dis pa ibas 94 Removing the Front Impeller Assembly 00 cece eee 96 Installing the Chassis into the back 97 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 99 Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly cece ees 100 Reinstalling the FPGS ae sd cu E E be 101 Reinstalling the Pan Tray Lt Aaa 102 Reinstalling the Rear Low
337. ving an MCS e O98 2 2000 80 9 ec Extractor clip Installing an MCS To install an MCS follow this procedure see Figure 82 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Replacing Host Module Components m 161 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Place one hand under the MCS to support it and grasp one of the extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand Align the rear of the MCS with the guides inside the chassis and slide it in completely Press the extractor clip at each end of the MCS inward Verify that the green LED labeled OK on the MCS faceplate is lit Also check the host module LEDs on the craft interface to verify that the green LED labeled ONLINE is lit for the host module to which the MCS belongs Figure 11 shows the LEDs You can also verify correct MCS functioning by issuing the show chassis environment mcs command described in Maintaining Host Module Components on page 131 Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner to secure it to the chassis For complete instructions see Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109 CAUTION To maintain proper airflow and provide e
338. virta poistettaisiin t ysin laitteesta Attention Cette unit est quip e de plusieurs raccordements d alimentation Pour supprimer tout courant lectrique de l unit tous les cordons d alimentation doivent tre d branch s Warnung Diese Einheit verf gt ber mehr als einen Stromanschlu amp um Strom ganzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten m ssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein Avvertenza Questa unit ha pi di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico tutte le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l elettricit dall unit Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn n stremtilkobling Alle tilkoblinger ma kobles helt fra for eliminere strom fra enheten Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conex o de fonte de alimentac o de energia para poder remover a fonte de alimentac o de energia dever o ser desconectadas todas as conex es existentes Atenci n Esta unidad tiene m s de una conexi n de suministros de alimentaci n para eliminar la alimentaci n por completo deben desconectarse completamente todas las conexiones Varning Denna enhet har mer n en str mf rs rjningsanslutning alla anslutningar m ste vara helt avl gsnade innan str mtillf rseln till enheten ar fullst ndigt bruten Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before working on the router or near power supplies unplug the power cord from an AC router switch off the power at the circuit breaker on a D
339. w through the Chassis on page 40 Cooling System MN 39 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Cooling System Components The cooling system has the following components All are hot removable and hot insertable as described in Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 4 Air intake vent air filter and intake cover Provide an opening for room air to enter the router They are located at the bottom of the chassis front below the cable management system as shown in Figure 1 The air filter is removable and covers the air intake vent preventing dust and other particles from entering the cooling system For maintenance and replacement instructions see Maintaining the Air Filter on page 128 The nonremovable air intake cover is located behind the air filter and provides EMC shielding AN CAUTION Do not remove the air filter for more than a few minutes while the router is operating The fans and impellers are powerful enough to draw in foreign material such as bits of wire through the unfiltered air intake which could damage router components Front cooling subsystem Cools the FPCs PICs and midplane It includes a fan tray located behind the cable management system and a large central impeller behind the craft interface For replacement instructions see Replacing the Fan Tray on page 148 and Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 150 Rear cooling subsystem Cools the SFMs host module PCGs and po
340. wer supplies It includes one impeller located at the upper right of the chassis rear and another at the lower left as shown in Figure 2 The upper and lower impellers are not interchangeable For replacement instructions see Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 154 and Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 156 Airflow through the Chassis 40 Cooling System Figure 20 shows airflow through the chassis and the location of the impellers and fan tray Figure 20 Airflow through the Chassis Cable Management System The cable management system see Figure 21 consists of a row of nine Front view Side view s S Impeller Impeller 7 gt ol z lo KH T Front Rear Card cage Ho o o gt Fan tray Air intake cover E d gt x NS A A a Hardware Component Overview Top view Rear ez ee Impeller upper rear Impeller upper front Front 1170 semicircular plastic bobbins mounted on the front of the router below the FPC card cage The PIC cables pass between the bobbins and into the tray keeping the cables organized and securely in place The curvature of the bobbins also helps maintain the proper bend radius for optical PIC cables Figure 21 Cable Management System Cable management system
341. x with the opening in the chassis then push the circuit breaker box straight in Tighten the thumbscrews at the top and bottom edge of the circuit breaker box Using a Phillips screwdriver tighten the screw at each corner of the box Slide the power cable lugs for both power sources onto the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box Replacing Power System Components N 195 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 196 m Connect the positive source cable lugs to the return terminals on the circuit breaker box which are labeled RTN m Connect the negative source cable lugs to the input terminals on the circuit breaker box which are labeled 48V 7 Slide a washer and then screw a nut onto each terminal stud if the washers and nuts were not installed on the studs they should be in the accessory box Using a 7 16 in nut driver or wrench tighten the nuts CAUTION Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench A tool that does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them If a 7 16 in tool is not available use pliers or an adjustable wrench 8 Replace the protective shield on the circuit breaker box and tighten the screws that secure it to the box 9 Replace the rear lower impeller assembly by lining up the rails with the guides inside the chassis pushing the impeller straight in and tightening the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover For complete instructions see Installing the Rear Lower Impell
342. y c Pull the cable connector straight out of the port d Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device 2 Plug the female end of the replacement serial cable into the appropriate CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port Figure 66 shows the external device ports on the CIP The ports labeled HOST O connect to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot RE 0 and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot RE 1 3 Tighten the screws on the connector using a 2 5 mm flat blade screwdriver if necessary 4 Power on the auxiliary or console device Figure 68 Serial Port Connector 1027 Replace Alarm Relay Wires To connect the router to external alarm reporting devices attach wires to the RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM relay contacts on the CIP A system condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the router They accept wire of any gauge between 24 AWG and 12 AWG 0 20 and 3 33 mm2 which is not provided Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are connecting To replace the wires connecting to an alarm reporting device follow this procedure see Figure 66 1 Disconnect the existing wire at the external device 2 Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 24 AWG and
343. y completely out of the chassis after the fans stop spinning Figure 69 Removing the Fan Tray EE Ek E gl s e A i 1936 zi 9 Installing the Fan Tray To install the fan tray follow this procedure see Figure 70 AN CAUTION When sliding the fan tray into the chassis take care not to catch and pinch any dangling PIC cables with the edges of the tray Also make sure your fingers are not near the fans which start spinning as soon as the fan tray contacts the midplane Replacing Cooling System Components m 149 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis Make sure the router is attached to a proper earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226 Grasp the sides of the fan tray and align the rear of the tray with the guides inside the chassis Slide the fan tray all the way into the chassis Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the cable management system Rearrange the PIC cables in the cable management system For more information about proper cable arrangement see Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 134 Figure 70 Installing the Fan Tray De o EA gt oje Sus S R 1937 8 z Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly 150
344. your body as you lift Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid Installation Instructions Warning A WARNING Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a power source Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de voeding verbindt Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 239 M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide 240 Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen jarjestelman yhdist mist virtal hteeseen Attention Avant de brancher le syst me sur la source d alimentation consulter les directives d installation Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen bevor Sie das System an die Stromquelle anschlie en Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema all alimentatore Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene for systemet kobles til stremkilden Aviso Leia as instruc es de instalac o antes de ligar o sistema sua fonte de energia jAtenci n Ver las instrucciones de instalaci n antes de conectar el sistema a la red de alimentaci n Varning L s installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess str mf rs rjningsenhet Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings Ensure that the equipment rack into which the router is installed is evenly and securely supported to avoid the hazardous condition that could result from uneven mechanical loading WARNING To prevent bodily injury when mountin

Entire manual as PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents